75-53rC.1 RMXdigital manual
Broadcast
Console
Operations
&
Technical
Manual
PRE75-53
Revision C.1 • 12/10
Broadcast Communications Division
www.broadcast.harris.com
ii
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T I O N
Revision C • 10/07
Contents
CE Declaration of Conformity ........................ iv
5- SERVICE
Safety Instructions ......................................... v
Hazard/Warning Label Identification ............. v
Manual Revisions .......................................... vi
Parts and Repair Services ............................ 5-1
Spare and Replacement Parts ...................... 5-2
Console Troubleshooting .............................. 5-3
1 - GENERAL INFORMATION
Control Panel Servicing ............................... 5-5
Console Display Service ............................... 5-6
Product Overview ....................................... 1-1
Backup Batteries ......................................... 5-7
Specifications .............................................. 1-6
Warranty ..................................................... 1-8
48 Volt Power Supply .................................. 5-7
Frame Component Info ................................ 5-8
KSU Card Service Info ................................ 5-9
2 - HARDWARE INSTALLATION
DSP Card Service Info ................................. 5-9
Console Installation ..................................... 2-2
Cabling and Wiring ................................... 2-10
8-Input Expansion Card Service Info ........... 5-9
Motherboard Service Info .......................... 5-10
Installation Quick Guides
Frame & Console Display ..................... 2-20
KSU Card ............................................ 2-21
6 - ACCESSORIES
Furniture and Cabinetry .............................. 6-1
Accessory Panels ......................................... 6-1
8-Input Expansion Card ....................... 2-25
VistaMax Connections ......................... 2-26
Mic Remote Control Logic Example .......... 2-27
Host Turret ................................................. 6-3
RMXdigital Divider Kit ............................... 6-3
Basic Peripheral Logic Example ................ 2-28
Complex Peripheral Logic Example .......... 2-29
Headphone Distribution Amp ..................... 6-3
ESE/SMPTE Master Clock Cable ................ 6-3
Buttoncap Lenses ...................................... 2-30
Logic Wiring ............................................... 6-3
3 - CONSOLE OPERATION
APPENDIX A: VMCC, SESSIONS &
MACROS
Console Overview ......................................... 3-1
Panel Quick Guides
VMCC File Maintenance ............................. A-1
Universal Dual Fader Input Panel ............ 3-2
Community Monitor ................................... A-1
Monitor Control Panel ............................. 3-4
Console Display ...................................... 3-8
RMXdigital Applications .............................. 3-9
VMCC Operations Errata ........................... A-3
Setup, Config, General File Info .................. A-7
Macro Files ................................................ A-8
VistaMax Integration .............................. 3-9
Telco/Codec Operation .......................... 3-10
Phantom Channels & Buses ..................... A-10
4 - RMXDIGITAL SERVER
INDEX
RMXd File Structure .................................... 4-1
RMXd Server Configuration ......................... 4-5
A - C ..................................................... Index-1
C - L ..................................................... Index-2
L - R ..................................................... Index-3
Session Files ............................................... 4-17
Session & Macro Files ................................ 4-20
S - W ..................................................... Index-4
Software Updates ....................................... 4-27
Settings Recovery ....................................... 4-27
iii
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T I O N
Revision C • 10/07
Declaration
of
Conformity
Application of Council Directive: 89/336/EEC
Standards To Which EN55103-1 (Studio Environment)
Conformity Is Declared:
EN55022 Class A
Magnetic Field Emissions
EN55103-2 (Studio Environment)
EN61000-4-2
EN61000-4-3
EN61000-4-4
EN61000-4-6
EN61000-4-8
Magnetic Field Immunity
Manufacturer’s Name: Harris Corporation BCD
Manufacturer’s Shipping Address: 4240 Irwin Simpson Road
Mason, Ohio USA 45040
513.459.3400
Manufacturer’s Mailing Address: 4593 Digital Way
Mason, Ohio USA 45040
513.459.3400
Equipment Description: Radio Mixing Console
Equipment Class: Audio Equipment - Studio
Model Numbers: RMXdigital Broadcast Console
I the undersigned, hereby declare that the equipment specified
above, conforms to the above Directive(s) and Standard(s).
Harris Corporation–Mason Ohio USA
Place
Signature
Ted Staros
Full Name
Director–Console Product Development
Position
iv
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T I O N
Revision C • 10/07
Safety Instructions
uc
tions
1. R ead A
Allll Instr
Instruc
uctions
tions.. Read all safety and operating
instructions before operating the product.
uc
tions
2. R etain A
Allll Instr
Instruc
uctions
tions.. Retain all safety and operating
instructions for future reference.
nings
3. Heed A
Allll Wa rrnings
nings.. You must adhere to all warnings
on the product and those listed in the operating
instructions.
w A
ll Instr
ollow
All
Instruc
uctions
tions.. Follow all operating and
4. Follo
uc
tions
product usage instructions.
5. H ea
eatt . This product must be situated away from any
heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves,
or other products (including power amplifiers) that
produce heat.
tila
tion. Slots and openings in the product are
6. V en
entila
tilation.
provided for ventilation.They ensure reliable operation
of the product and keep it from overheating. Do not
block or cover these openings during operation. Do
not place this product into a rack unless proper
ventilation is provided and the manufacturer’s
recommended installation procedures are followed.
e. Do not use this product near
7. Wa t er and M
Moistur
oisture
oistur
water such as a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming
pool or the like.
8. A ttachmen
ttachmentt ss.. Do not use any attachments not
recommended by the product manufacturer as they
may cause hazards.
our
9. Power SSour
ourcces
es.. You must operate this product using
the type of power source indicated on the marking
label and in the installation instructions. If you are not
sure of the type of power supplied to your facility,
consult your local power company.
o l a rrii z aatt iion
10. G r ounding and PPo
o n . This product is
equipped with a polarized AC plug with integral safety
ground pin. Do not defeat the safety ground in any
manner.
or
d PPrr ot
ec
tion. Power supply cords must be
11. Power C
Cor
ord
otec
ection.
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on nor
pinched by items placed upon or against them. Pay
particular attention to the cords at AC wall plugs and
convenience receptacles, and at the point where the
cord plugs into the product.
tning
12. Ligh
Lightning
tning.. For added protection for this product,
unplug it from the AC wall outlet during a lightning
storm or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time. This will prevent damage to the
product due to lightning and power line surges.
loading
13. O v e rrloading
loading.. Do not overload AC wall outlets,
extension cords, or integral convenience outlets as this
can result in a fire or electric shock hazard.
n tr
tryy. Never push objects of any
14. Objec
bjectt and Liquid EEn
kind into this product through openings as they may
touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts,
which could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill
liquid of any kind on the product.
essor
ies
15. A cc
ccessor
essories
ies.. Do not place this product on an unstable
cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may
fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult and serious
damage to the product. Any mounting of the product
must follow manufacturer’s installation instructions.
ombina
tion. Move this product
16. P r oduc
ductt and C
Caa rrtt C
Combina
ombination.
with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven
surfaces may cause the product and the cart
combination to overturn.
vicing
17. S e rrvicing
vicing.. Refer all servicing to qualified servicing
personnel.
equir
ing SSe
e rrvic
vic
e . Unplug this product
18. D amage RRequir
equiring
vice
from the wall AC outlet and refer servicing to qualified
service personnel under the following conditions:
a. When the AC cord or plug is damaged.
b. If liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into
the product.
c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
d. If the product does not operate normally (following
operating instructions).
e. If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way.
f. When the product exhibits a distinct change in
performance. This indicates a need for service.
emen
ts
19. R eplac
eplacemen
ementt PPaa rrts
ts.. When replacement parts are
required, be sure the service technician has used
replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or
that have the same characteristics as the original parts.
Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric
shock, or other hazards.
et
heck. Upon completion of any repairs to this
20. S a ffet
etyy C
Check.
product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper
operating condition.
21. C leaning
leaning.. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use
only a damp cloth for cleaning.
Hazard/Warning Label Identification
tion PPoin
oin
ol
The E x clama
clamation
ointt symb
symbol
ol,
within an equilateral triangle, alerts the
user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in product literature and
instruction manuals.
C A U T I O N
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
WARNING: SHOCK HAZARD - DO NOT OPEN
AVIS: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE - NE PAS OUVRIR
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT
REMOVE ANY COVER OR PANEL. NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THE POWER SUPPLY OR CONSOLE
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
tning FFlash
lash W ith
The Ligh
Lightning
A r r owhead symb
ol
symbol
ol, within an
equilateral triangle, alerts the user to
the presence of uninsulated
dangerous voltage within the
product’s enclosure that may be of
sufficient magnitude to constitute a
risk of electric shock.
WARNING
ARNING—This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions in this
manual it may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device
(pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 FCC Rules), which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user, at his own expense, will be
required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
v
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T I O N
Revision C • 10/07
Manual Revisions
T
his page provides a quick reference of the
current document pages and their revision level. If
you receive a revision to this document from Harris,
replace the old manual pages with the new ones and
discard the old pages. Replace this page with the
new Manual Revisions page.
Revision Affected pages
Comments
A
All pages
6/04 First Release
B
All pages
8/05 VMCC info added
C
All pages
10/07 reflective meter
& 500-series code
information added
vi
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T I O N
Revision C • 10/07
General
Information
T
1
Product Overview
hanks for joining the growing ranks of
The RMXdigital is a low profile, digitally-controlled, routable audio console that sits in a coun-
broadcasters employing Harris Corporation prod-
tertop cutout. Framesizes with 12, 20 or 28 control strips are available. The console can operate
ucts designed by PR&E. Our mission: provide the
in a stand-alone capacity or, for maximum flexibility and usability, be integrated with a VistaMax
finest quality products, systems, documentation and
Audio Management System.
A separate Console Display, with two stereo bar-
after-sale support.
graph meters, an ESE/SMPTE-compatible Clock
To obtain the maximum benefit from the
and Event Timer, is included. The display sits on
console’s capabilities, read through the chapters
the countertop near the mainframe and plugs into
on Installation, Operation and the RMXd Server
the frame using a captive six-foot cable harness.
prior to actual product installation.
The console is designed for 24/7 operation. It
An RMXdigital console ships with the follow-
has two power connections, with integral coupler,
ing items:
for a main and a redundant supply (PRE99-1205).
• Mainframe, with 12, 20 or 28 input slots
One supply is included with the mainframe.
All RMXdigital components (console, display,
• Universal Dual Fader Panels, installed, as
and power supply) are convection cooled for com-
ordered
pletely silent operation.
• Monitor Control Panel, 1 standard
RMXdigital circuit board electronics are con-
• KSU Card, 1 standard
• DSP Card, one standard on the 12-input;
tained within an aluminum chassis for strength
two standard on the 20-input; three stan-
and RFI immunity. All user connections are made
dard on the 28-input)
from the top surface. The connectors, and cable
access openings, are located below a hinged cue
• 8-Input Expansion Card, optional, total
speaker panel behind the main control surface.
number installed: up to the number of DSP
Each RMXdigital mainframe (and the rack-
Cards installed in the mainframe
mount RMXd8-HL) comes standard with a KSU
• Single or Dual Width Blank Panels, as required, to cover unpopulated input slots
Card that has these connections:
• Four program and one send output (each has a
• 48 VDC Power Supply, 1 standard
dedicated analog and an AES digital output)
• Console Display, 1 low-profile display stan-
• Analog control room outputs (for a monitor amp,
dard; original display, optional
• Installation Kit, 1 standard
and for operator and guest headphone amps) *
• Tool Kit, 1 standard
• Analog studio outputs (for a monitor amp, and
• CD-ROM, 1 standard
for host and guest headphone amps) *
1-1
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T I O N
Revision C • 10/07
1
General
Information
VISTAMAX CONTROL CENTER
• Cue speaker and Cue monitor output *
The RMXdigital is set up for daily use through
• Three talk audio outputs (Talk to: control room,
configuration files that are maintained by the sup-
studio, and an external location) *
• Eight routable audio inputs (four analog and four
plied VistaMax Control Center (VMCC) software.
digital inputs, independently routable to any
Monitor switch functions, channel button settings
channel strip) that are VistaMax sources
and audio routing is “soft controlled” through setup
• Eight routable audio outputs (four analog and
parameters—initially auto-loaded through a con-
four digital outputs, independently routed from
trol file, called init.mac, and adjusted as re-
any console bus) that are VistaMax destinations
quired through session file settings.
• Dedicated control room, studio and cue/talk/
The initial console settings can be changed, as
external logic connectors, with three Assignable
required by board operators, through manually
Logic I/O connectors *
selecting different input signal sources and chang-
• VistaMax facet Link connectors (two copper RJ-
ing control surface button assignments, or by load-
45, standard; two optical MT-RJ connectors, op-
ing a session file—a pre-saved file that reconfigures
tional) plus an Ethernet connection for commu-
the console for a different daypart or function.
nicating with a VistaMax LAN
SESSION FILES
• Serial Test Interface connection for diagnostic
Session files are initially created right on the
and system software maintenance
console by selecting input sources and setting desired switch conditions, then pressing Save on the
* These connections are typically not used on the
RMXd-8HL
Monitor Control panel. This action creates a new
session file—which never affects previously saved
Additional audio inputs and logic I/O can be
session files. The new session file can then be ed-
added in a mainframe by installing the optional
ited using a text-only editor on a Windows® com-
8-Input Expansion Card onto a DSP card. Each
puter, if required, and then saved back to the con-
Expansion Card has eight audio inputs (individu-
sole over the LAN connection. The session is then
ally switch set as an analog or a digital input) and
“dialed up” by the operator using the Monitor Con-
eight Assignable Logic I/O connectors to associ-
trol panel session selector and Take button.
ate logic with the eight inputs. The audio inputs
For some facilities, a single customized session
are independently routed to channel strips through
file may be sufficient to set up a console for all
session file settings or by manually selecting a
users but it is more likely that multiple session
source using a channel strip source selector. Dur-
files will be created to set the console for different
ing console setup, audio inputs can be “bound” to
dayparts or different operations (e.g., one console
logic I/O connectors for channel logic control to
could serve split duty, being a newsroom feeding
and from peripheral devices and mic control pan-
live audio to air during the day, but then changing
els.
to a production room at night).
One 8-Input Expansion card can be added to a
Since session files can change any number of
12-input frame, up to two cards can be added to a
console settings, dayparting the console is as easy
20-input frame and up to three cards can be in-
as selecting the desired session file and pressing
stalled in a 28-input frame.
Take—once the session files have been created,
edited and saved back to the console.
1-2
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T I O N
Revision C • 10/07
1
General
Information
Universal Dual Fader Panels
For example, if the “morningzoo” session is currently loaded on a RMXdigital-12 console, and it
Each Dual Fader panel has two sets of channel
has configured the console inputs as: five mics
strip controls with these functions: channel on/
(each with the talent’s name shown in the channel
off; fader level control; cue on/off; momentary talk-
display), three Telco channels (two phone hybrid
back control to remotes or callers (active when
caller inputs and an ISDN live remote input) and
the channel strip is set as a Telco channel); input
four line inputs (three digital delivery inputs for
source selector and take button; input mode but-
sound FX, music beds, commercials, etc., and a
tons with pan/balance pot; send bus on/off, mode
traffic or weather service feed).
and level control; and assignment buttons for four
To switch the console for the midday daypart
program and one offline bus.
(one board operator/jock who takes requests and
A ten-character display on each channel strip
plays back all sources from a digital delivery sys-
normally shows the input source name. Alternate
tem), means there is some extensive switching that
source names are shown when the yellow Next
must take place on a non-programmable console.
LED is lit during source selection.
On the RMXdigital, however, it is done simply
A channel strip control can be assigned to con-
by dialing up and taking the “midday” session—
trol any type of audio source: mic; line; router;
which immediately reconfigures the console, re-
Telco, as required by a particular daypart.
sulting in Input 1 being the control room mic (with
The audio source for each fader is initially set
the jock’s name shown in the channel display, if
by loading a session file. The input’s source name
desired); the next four inputs are routed from the
(or an alias name) is shown in the ten-character
digital delivery system for music, liners and com-
display above each fader. If no signal is routed to
mercials, while Input 6 remains the hybrid input
the fader, then SILENCE is displayed.
(for those call-in music requests). The remaining
The capacity to change the source—via a source
Telco and input channels could be left alone or
selector and Take button, is a standard part of each
they could be routed to silence, remaining avail-
channel strip since the physical audio source for
able for the board operator to use as required.
each channel is “virtual”—it can be any physical
To prevent on-air interruptions, any channels
console input (analog or digital) and, when the
that are On-Air when a session file is taken do not
console is tied into a VistaMax system, any input
immediately change settings. Instead, those chan-
source on any VistaMax device networked with
nels only change to the new session file settings
the RMXdigital console. To simplify operation, the
when that channel is turned off in order to effect
available sources can be individually limited on a
seamless show transitions.
channel strip through session file settings.
The input audio may also be linked with logic
MAIN COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
from a peripheral or mic control panel to provide
An RMXdigital console has only three compo-
fully independent parallel logic control functions
nents—as seen and used by the board operator:
for remote control of the channel strip and/or
Universal Dual Fader panels, a Monitor Control
channel strip control of the source equipment.
panel and the Console Display.
Again, all of these parameters are set during con-
Additional descriptions are presented in this
sole configuration so that the operator never has
section for the power supply, KSU and DSP cards,
to concern themselves about logic or signal rout-
and for the optional 8-Input Expansion cards.
ing when the session files are properly crafted.
1-3
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T I O N
Revision C • 10/07
1
General
Information
Monitor Control Panel
When a source is selected using the source selector,
This standard panel is divided into three
the name is shown in the ten-character display
functional sections: Session, Control Room, and
and all source buttons are turned off.
Studio, by graphic lines on the panel.
Just above the monitor source display are two
level pots for setting the output levels of the cue
speaker and the control room talkback output.
Session Section
The middle of the left section has the session
Independent control room monitor and head-
controls for selecting and saving session files
phone fader level controls are at the bottom of
(rotary session selector, take and save buttons)
this section. The selected source is routed through
along with two ten-character displays for showing
the monitor mode controls in the left-hand sec-
the current session (in the top line) and a next
tion next to the top of the faders, which control
session (in the bottom line).
whether the monitor signal is stereo, left only, right
The Auxiliary Meter source selector buttons are
only, or mono (left and right summed together).
above the session controls. These allow one of
AutoCue, another mode control, sets whether
seven sources (defaults assignments are: Real Air,
cue feeds the headphone output. When unlit, cue
the send bus, the Telco record bus, and the four
activity does not affect the headphone output.
program buses) to feed the Auxiliary Meter located
When AutoCue is lit, the headphone output auto-
on the Console Display. The selected source name
matically switches to listen to the cue bus while
is shown below the Auxiliary Meter.
cue is active.
Just below the session controls are the Monitor
The AutoCue function has two modes, as set
Mode buttons that are covered in the Control
using the VMCC program. The default setting is
Room Section that follows.
Split Cue where the monitor and cue audio are
Five event timer control buttons are found at
separately summed to mono before going to the
the bottom of this section. Start, Stop, Hold, and
headphones. Cue audio is sent to the left ear while
Reset manually control the event timer in the
the monitor audio goes to the right ear. An alter-
Console Display. When the Auto Reset button is
native mode is Stereo Cue, where cue audio re-
lit, the timer can be reset automatically when a
placed the monitor audio with the Cue audio (in
channel is turned on. Which channels reset the
stereo in the headphones).
timer are set by session file commands.
Studio Section
The right-hand section of the Monitor Control
Control Room Section
The center section of the Monitor Control panel
panel has controls for a separate talk or voice
has monitor source selector buttons for the control
studio. Monitor source selection is done in the same
room monitor and operator headphone outputs.
manner as the control room: a source selector
A source can be selected from among the seven
button (at the top of this section) can be pressed,
buttons at the top of the center section (the defaults
or a source can be selected using the monitor
are the same as for the Aux. Meter), or by using
source selector and take button.
the monitor source selector and take button to
Level control of the dedicated studio monitor
select between an additional fifteen sources. The
and talkback outputs is done through the two
selected source button lights to indicate its
volume pots above the monitor source display.
selection, while blanking the selected name display.
1-4
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T I O N
Revision C • 10/07
1
General
Information
This section of the Monitor Control panel also
On the consoles, the KSU card plugs into the
has two talkback buttons so the board operator
motherboard behind the Monitor Control panel
can talk to the studio and/or to an external
and the two adjacent Dual Fader Input panels. In
location using the board operator’s microphone.
normal use it’s hidden below the cue speaker panel.
The KSU consists of an SBC (Single Board Com-
Console Display
puter), a VistaMax interface, and DSP for the eight
The separate Console Display sits or stands on
routed KSU inputs/outputs and the bus outputs.
the countertop behind or to the side of the con-
DSP Card
sole control surface. The Main Meter shows the
PGM 1 output levels. The Aux Meter shows the
The number of DSP (Digital Signal Processor)
cue bus, when active, or a source selected using
cards installed is frame size dependent (RMXd-
the Aux Meter source controls on the monitor
12 has one DSP Card, RMXd-20 has two, and
panel.
RMXd-28 has three cards). DSP Cards plug into
An ESE and SMPTE-compatible time of day
the lower motherboard behind the Universal Dual
clock and an event timer (controlled by Monitor
Fader Input panels, hidden below the cue speaker
Control panel buttons and/or reset commands
panel in normal use. Each card handles routing
from one or more channels) are also on the Con-
for eight stereo audio inputs and eight Assignable
sole Display.
Logic I/Os. Each card has DSP “heartbeat” and
automation LEDs to indicate operational status.
The display plugs into the console motherboard
using a six-foot captive cable harness.
8-Input Expansion Card
KSU Card
This optional audio input and logic I/O card
Each RMXdigital (including the RMXd8-HL)
(PRE99-2665) adds eight audio inputs and eight
has one KSU Card with eight assignable audio
Assignable Logic I/O connectors to any DSP Card,
inputs and eight assignable outputs; three Assign-
in lieu of the blank panel between the DSP card
able Logic I/O connectors; dedicated logic con-
and the control surface. An 8-Input Expansion
nectors for control room, studio, and cue/talk/
card can be added to each DSP card.
external logic; eighteen dedicated analog and digi-
Each audio input is physically set as an analog
tal program and monitor outputs; aVistaMax LAN
or a digital input by a board-mounted DIP switch.
connector; a serial test connector; and two copper
The input is assigned to a channel strip (or set as
(RJ-45) VistaMax Link connectors.
a VistaMax input) by the session file. The Assign-
A KSU card with two MT-RJ optical VistaMax
able logic connections can be “bound” to any one
Link connectors (PRE99-2672-2) is available for
of the audio inputs, and then jointly assigned to a
interconnecting the console to a VistaMax system
channel strip, or they can be used separately from
when the distance between console and VistaMax
any of the audio inputs as determined by the cur-
frame exceeds 100 meters (the maximum length
rent session file settings.
supported using CAT-5e or CAT-6 cables).The MT-
Power Supply
RJ optical connections support runs up to 2 km.
An optical Link RMXd8-HL (PRE99-1910-2) is
A separate rackmount power supply (PRE99-
also available.
1205) supplies +48 VDC to the console mainframe.
One supply comes standard with each mainframe.
1-5
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T I O N
Revision C • 10/07
1
General
Information
Specifications
The RMXd8-HL has a built-in 48-volt supply. All
are supplied with a 110 VAC IEC input cord.
Two keyed 48-volt power cables are supplied
Specifications are for the basic signal paths, per
with the console mainframe Installation Kit so that
channel, with 600 ohm loads connected to the ana-
a second PRE99-1205 supply (optional) can eas-
log program outputs in a fully loaded RMXdigital
ily be added for redundant supply operation. The
28-input slot mainframe.
mainframe and the RMXd8-HL include an inte-
0 dBu equals 0.775 volts RMS regardless of cir-
gral power coupler so a second redundant supply
cuit impedance, which equals 0 dBm into a 600
can be connected.
ohm circuit. Noise specs based on 22 kHz measurement bandwidth. A 30 kHz bandwidth mea-
The power supply (and the RMXd8-HL) has a
surement increases noise by about 1.7 dB.
recessed front panel On/Off switch along with a
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD+N) is mea-
green LED that indicates the +48 volt output is
sured at a +18 dBu output, using a swept signal
good.
and a 22 kHz low pass filter.
The power supply is designed for continuous
FSD = Full Scale Digital, +24 dBu
24/7 operation and is fully regulated and protected
against excessive current by internal fuses and elec-
Analog Line Inputs
tronic safeguards.
Input Impedance: >60 k ohms, balanced
Input Level Range: -10 dBv to +4 dBu (soft trim)
Input Headroom: 20 dB above nominal input
Analog Outputs
Output Source Impedance: <3 ohms balanced
Output Load Impedance: 600 ohms minimum
Nominal Output Level: +4 dBu
Maximum Output Level: +24 dBu
Digital Inputs and Outputs
Reference Level: +4 dBu (-20 dB FSD)
Signal Format: AES-3, S/PDIF (input only)
AES-3 Input & Output Compliance: 24-bit sample rate
conversion
Digital Reference: Crystal (internal) or VistaMax
slave (external) at 48 kHz ±100 ppm
Internal Sample Rate: 48 kHz
Output Sample Rate: 48 kHz (PGM 1, PGM 2 or
Send can be set for 44.1 kHz)
Processing Resolution: 24-bit fixed with extended
precision accumulators
Conversions: A/D 24-bit, Delta-Sigma, 128x oversampling on all digital inputs; D/A 24-bit, DeltaSigma, 128x oversampling
Latency: <1.6 ms, input to monitor out
1-6
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T I O N
Revision C • 10/07
1
Monitor Outputs
General
Information
Power Supply Ground
Output Source Impedance: <3 ohms, balanced
Output Load Impedance: 1 k ohms minimum
Output Level: +4 dBu nominal, +24 dBu maximum
Rack mounted power supply: grounded through AC
cord
Power Supply Connection
AC input: IEC power cord
DC output: Keyed multi-pin connector
Frequency Response
Line Input to Program or Send Output: +0 dB/-0.5 dB,
20 Hz to 20 kHz
Dimensions
For all RMXdigital frames: height above countertop
is 2.25" [57]. Depth below countertop is 9.85"
[250] at the rear of the frame. Front-to-back
depth is 22" [559]. See page 2-1 for a side view
with dimension details.
RMXd-12 is 27.4" [696] wide
RMXd-20 is 40.2" [1021] wide
RMXd-28 is 53.0" [1346] wide
Dynamic Range
Analog Input to Analog Output: 104 dB referenced to
FSD, 107 dB “A” weighted to FSD
Analog Input to Digital Output: 105 dB referenced to
FSD, 108 dB “A” weighted to FSD
Digital Input to Analog Output: 110 dB referenced to
FSD, 113 dB “A” weighted to FSD
Digital Input to Digital Output: 125 dB
RMXd8-HL (Rack mounted):
2 RU: 3.5" [89] x 19" [483] x 10" [254]
Total Harmonic Distortion + Noise
Analog Input to Analog Output: <0.003%, 20 Hz to
20 kHz, +18 dBu input, +18 dBu output
Digital Input to Digital Output: <0.0005%, 20 Hz to
20 kHz, -6 dB FSD input, -6 dB FSD output
Digital Input to Analog Output: <0.003%, 20 Hz to
20 kHz (<0.001%, typical at 1 kHz), -6 dB FSD
input, +18 dBu output
Console Display (sits/stands on countertop):
Original Tall Display: 11.13" [283] x 14.25"
[362] x 5.1" [130]
Low-Profile Display: 5" [127] x 17.25" [438] x
5.25" [133]
48 Volt Power Supply (Rack mounted):
2 RU: 3.5" [89] x 19" [483] x 10" [254]
Crosstalk Isolation
Program-to-Program or Program-to-Send: >95 dB, 20
Hz to 20 kHz
All dimensions: Height x Width x Depth.
Stereo Separation
Analog Program Outputs: >86 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Harris Corporation reserves the right to change
specifications without notice or obligation.
Console Power Requirements
RMXd8-HL: 48 watts
RMXd-12: 99 watts
RMXd-20 : 141 watts
RMXd-28 : 186 watts
Measured at 115/230 VAC, ±12%, 50/60 Hz
Power Supply Voltage
Console power: +48 VDC at 6.25 Amps.
(The console includes an integral power coupler for a primary and a redundant supply. One
supply is included with the mainframe, along
with two DC power cables.)
1-7
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T I O N
Revision C • 10/07
1
General
Information
Warranty
Each RMXdigital console, RMXd-8HL and 48volt power supply carry a standard manufacturer’s
warranty of 15 months from the DATE OF SHIPMENT from Harris.
A copy of the domestic (USA) product warranty
policy, dated July 1, 2007, is presented on the following two pages.
To view or download the current Harris Broadcast Communications Standard Warranty Policy
Statement for either domestic or international locations, visit this Harris corporate website page:
http://www.broadcast.harris.com/
support/warranties.asp
1-8
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T I O N
Revision C • 10/07
PRODUCT WARRANTY (USA)
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
For information about products or support services:
PROFESSIONAL SERVICES COMMITMENT
Call: +1 888 534 8246
Website: www.broadcast.harris.com
To register products or update company information visit:
https://premier.harris.com/broadcast/warranty_registration.asp
We are serious about our professional services business. We strive to
provide the highest level of support in the industry and offer a
complete set of integrated support solutions designed to help our
customers across every phase of their business. Harris works with you
to provide the type of coverage you need. We are committed to
service excellence.
Standard Warranty Services
Optional Gold ServicePAK
Technical support 9 hours a day, 5 days a week
After-hours emergency “Down or Off-air” phone support
5-day advance exchange of parts
Software updates and bug fixes
Access to technical knowledge bank
Technical phone support 24 hours a day, 7 days a week
Next-day advance exchange of parts
HARRIS BROADCAST COMMUNICATIONS
STANDARD WARRANTY POLICY STATEMENT
Effective July 1, 2007
STANDARD EQUIPMENT WARRANTY
Harris Corporation (“Harris”) warrants that all Harris Broadcast Communications-manufactured equipment will be free of any defect in materials or
workmanship for the period of time specified in the table below (or such other time period as agreed in writing by the parties). Warranty begins from
the date of shipment from a Harris facility. The warranty is ex-tended to customers and applies to all Harris Broadcast Communications-manufactured
equipment purchased, installed, and used for the purpose for which such equipment was originally designed.
Product Family
Transmitters (except Platinum VHF transmitters), Storage,
Servers, Automation, Graphics, Post Production, Consoles
and Audio Management Equipment
Test & Measurement, Routing & Distribution Equipment
Digital Exciters (Radio)
Platinum VHF Transmitters
B-Stock Equipment
Replacement Parts – within Standard Warranty Period
Replacement Parts – post Standard Warranty Period
Standard Equipment Warranty Period
15 months from shipment
27 months from shipment
39 months from shipment
63 months from shipment
Same as applicable product warranty
Longer of (i) applicable product warranty or (ii) 90 days from shipment
90 days from shipment
WARRANTY CLAIMS AND PROCEDURES
1.
During the applicable Standard Equipment Warranty Period outlined above, customer’s sole and exclusive remedy for any breach of the Standard
Equipment Warranty will be, at Harris’ sole discretion and option, repair or replacement of the defective product. Components that customer claims to
be defective must be available to Harris for inspection and evaluation. Unless otherwise agreed in writing by Harris, customs clearance for all
replacement parts under the warranty or otherwise will be customer’s sole responsibility. To be entitled to rights under the Standard Equipment
Warranty, the customer must notify Harris in writing within thirty (30) days after discovering a suspected defect in any product, but in any event prior
to the expiration of the applicable Standard Equipment Warranty Period. Notice to a Harris dealer, systems integrator, sales representative or other
third party is not notice to Harris. Following its receipt of any such customer notice, Harris will determine whether the reported problem is covered by
this Standard Equipment Warranty. If Harris determines that the problem is covered, Harris will authorize repair or replacement of the defective
product, as deemed appropriate by Harris in its sole discretion. For clarification purposes, any technical support provided by Harris will be for the sole
purpose of fulfilling Harris’ warranty obligations. If Harris determines that customer is using technical support as a substitute for training of customer’s
personnel, then such technical support will be subject to additional charges at Harris’ then prevailing unit rate for such services.
2.
Before shipping any product to Harris, the customer must obtain a written return authorization from Harris, and provide any proof of warranty
eligibility requested by Harris. Any product received by Harris without a return authorization may, at Harris’ option, be returned to the customer collect.
Once a return authorization is obtained, the customer is responsible for packing and shipping the product to which its warranty claim relates to a service
facility designated by Harris, with all shipping charges prepaid by Harris, within thirty (30) days after receipt of the return authorization. Harris will pay
for return of the repaired or replacement product to the customer if the repaired or replacement product is shipped to a designated Harris service
facility. In the event that the foregoing procedure is not followed by customer, Customer shall pay for return shipping of the defective equipment (or
part thereof) to Harris and Harris shall only pay delivery charges of the replacement equipment (or part thereof) to customer. Harris will use
commercially reasonable efforts to supply equipment (or part thereof) from the geographical region of customer’s site, so as to minimize freight and
duty. Harris bears the risk of loss or damage while the equipment (or part thereof) is in transit to customer from the Harris service center, and
customer bears the risk of loss or damage while the equipment (or part thereof) is in transit back to the Harris service center.
3.
Upon receipt of replacement equipment (or part thereof), customer has thirty (30) days to tender the defective equipment (or part thereof) to the
return carrier for shipment to the service center designated by Harris. If customer does not timely return the defective equipment (or part thereof),
Harris shall invoice customer for the list price of such equipment (or part thereof), plus applicable shipping. Such failure to return the equipment (or
part thereof) may, in Harris’ discretion, be grounds for termination of the warranty and/or suspension of any future advance exchange privileges until
such outstanding defective equipment has been returned. Under the Standard Equipment Warranty Harris will provide customer with new, rebuilt,
refurbished or alternate equipment (or part thereof) of equal or improved quality, as exchange equipment (or part thereof) to replace eligible defective
equipment (or part thereof). Any alternate equipment (or part thereof) will meet or exceed the specifications of the replaced equipment (or part
thereof). Rebuilt or refurbished equipment may bear cosmetic blemishes that do not affect performance. Unless otherwise specified by Harris in
writing, repaired or replaced equipment (or parts thereof) are covered only for the remainder of the term of the applicable Standard Equipment
Warranty. All defective equipment (or parts thereof) replaced by Harris become the property of Harris. Harris has no obligation to (i) service, exchange
or otherwise replace any equipment (or part thereof) that has been damaged, modified, abused, misused or over-used as determined by Harris or has
been used with non-Harris supplies or products that have caused damage or malfunction; (ii) paint, refinish, refurbish, restore or exchange any
equipment (or part thereof) with cosmetic blemishes; (iii) service, exchange or otherwise replace any equipment (or part thereof) if the same would
interfere with, impede or be redundant with normal or scheduled maintenance of such equipment (or part thereof); (iv) service, exchange or otherwise
replace any equipment (or part thereof) that is within sixty (60) days of the end of its production life; or (v) provide any application software support or
service involving application hardware or replace any accessories. If Harris elects to perform any such services at customer’s request, then such
services will be deemed a service call and all labor, parts and materials used for the service call will be charged at Harris’ then-prevailing rates.
Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way, Mason, OH USA 45040, Tel: 1 (513) 459 3400
www.broadcast.harris.com
Part Number: 158-000026-01
©2007 Harris Corporation
EQUIPMENT WARRANTY EXCLUSIONS
Harris does not warrant or guarantee, and is not responsible for:
1.
Defects, failures, damages or performance limitations caused in whole or in part by (A) power failures, surges, fires, floods, snow, ice, lightning,
excessive heat or cold, highly corrosive environments, accidents, actions of third parties, or other events outside of Harris’ control, or (B) customer’s
abuse, mishandling, misuse, negligence, improper storage, servicing or operation, or unauthorized attempts to repair or alter the equipment in any
way. Customer must provide qualified technical personnel to maintain and repair the equipment.
2.
Equipment built to customer’s specifications that are later found not to meet customer’s needs or expectations.
3.
The performance of the equipment when used in combination with equipment not purchased, specified, or approved by Harris.
4.
Signal coverage delivered by antenna equipment whether or not supplied by Harris.
5.
Batteries and other consumable goods.
ADDITIONAL WARRANTY NOTES
1.
OEM or third-party equipment that is incorporated into Harris equipment is covered under the applicable Harris Standard Equipment Warranty
unless the OEM or Third-Party equipment carries its own limited warranty, in which event the OEM or third-party warranty will apply to such equipment
incorporated into Harris equipment. For example and not limitation, CRTs, LCDs, FSMs and Optical Test products are OEM products that have a limited
1 year manufacturer’s warranty.
2.
Items Sold As Resale. Items sold as resale are such items that are not manufactured by Harris but may be utilized in conjunction with or
independently of Harris manufactured equipment (such as tubes, printers and antenna transmission lines) and shall be covered only by the specific
warranty terms of the supplier or original equipment manufacturer of those items. IF AN ORDER COVERS EQUIPMENT NOT OWNED BY HARRIS, IT IS
SOLD SUBJECT TO HARRIS’ ACQUISITION OF POSSESSION.
3.
B-Stock Equipment. B-Stock equipment for non-transmitter related equipment is defined as any non-out-of-production product that is less than
three (3) years old. B-Stock equipment related to transmitters is defined as equipment repurchased by Harris that is reconditioned or refurbished for
sale to a second generation owner by Harris or its reseller.
4.
Used Equipment. IF THE EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED IN AN ORDER IS DESCRIBED AS USED, UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED IN WRITING BY THE
PARTIES, IT IS SOLD “AS IS” AND WITH NO WARRANTY.
SERVICES WARRANTY
Harris warrants that the services will be performed in a professional manner (the “Services Warranty”). Notice of a breach of the Services Warranty
must (i) specify in reasonable detail, the nature of the claim, and (ii) be received within ninety (90) days from the last day of performance of the
services. Upon notice of a breach of the services warranty and Harris’ determination of the validity of such breach of the Services Warranty, Harris will
re-perform the applicable services at Harris’ expense. If after reasonable opportunity Harris is unable to re-perform such services to the reasonable
satisfaction of customer, customer may, as its exclusive remedy, obtain a refund of the fees paid to Harris under the applicable order for such services.
SOFTWARE WARRANTY
1.
Physical Media. Harris warrants all physical media (“software media”) for the licensed programs, including without limit custom software and
traffic translators (“Licensed Programs”), to be free of defects in material or workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of completed
installation, or if customer should assume responsibility for installation of the software, for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of shipment of the
Licensed Programs by Harris (the “Software Warranty Period”). This limited warranty extends only to customer as the original licensee. Customer’s
sole and exclusive remedy under this limited warranty will be, at Harris’ option, repair or replacement of the software media.
2.
Licensed Programs. Harris warrants that during the Software Warranty Period (or such other time period as agreed in writing by the parties) the
Licensed Programs shall operate substantially in compliance with Harris’ specifications for the Licensed Programs (the “Software Warranty”). The entire
liability of Harris under this limited warranty is to provide, free of charge, a corrected copy of any portion of the Licensed Programs which is found by
Harris inspection not to be in substantial compliance with its specifications. If Harris is unable to provide a corrected copy of the Licensed Programs
within a reasonable time, as customer’s sole and exclusive remedy, Harris will replace the same with a functionally similar program or refund to
customer the amounts customer paid Harris to purchase or license such Licensed Programs. Harris does not warrant that such programs are error free
or that customer will be able to operate such programs without problems or interruptions. Corrections to the Licensed Programs beyond the Software
Warranty Period will only be made by Harris pursuant to a separate software maintenance agreement.
3.
Cost of Corrections. During the Software Warranty Period, Harris will bear the material cost and shipment of corrected or replacement Licensed
Programs at no charge to customer. Software corrections will be sent via e-mail. In the rare event customer requires a Harris customer support
engineer to visit the site, related reasonable pre-approved on-site time and travel expenses will be billed at the prevailing daily rates, unless otherwise
agreed to in writing prior to the visit. A ONE-DAY MINIMUM CHARGE APPLIES TO ALL ON-SITE VISITS.
4.
Software Warranty Exclusions. The Software Warranty does not apply to any software media or Licensed Program that (A) has been altered or
modified, except by Harris; (B) has not been installed, operated, repaired, or maintained in accordance with instructions supplied by Harris; (C) has
been subjected to abnormal physical or electrical stress, misuse, negligence, or accident; or (D) is used in ultra-hazardous activities.
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS STANDARD WARRANTY POLICY STATEMENT, HARRIS HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL
REPRESENTATIONS, CONDITIONS AND WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BY WAY OF EXAMPLE AND NOT LIMITATION, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
LIMITATION ON LIABILITY
NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING HEREIN TO THE CONTRARY, IN NO EVENT WILL HARRIS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING LOSS OF PROFITS, WHETHER ARISING IN CONTRACT, TORT, WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE,
EVEN IF IT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THE LIMITATIONS SET FORTH HERE WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE REMEDIES OF
ERROR CORRECTION, REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT, REPERFORMANCE OF SERVICES AND REFUND OF PAYMENTS COMPLETELY FAIL OF THEIR ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING HEREIN TO THE CONTRARY, THE LIMIT OF HARRIS’ LIABILITY (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT,
NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BY STATUTE OR OTHERWISE) TO CUSTOMER OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY CONCERNING THE HARRIS EQUIPMENT OR
SOFTWARE LICENSES SOLD TO CUSTOMER AND WARRANTED HEREUNDER, HARRIS’ PERFORMANCE OR NONPERFORMANCE, OR IN ANY MANNER
RELATED TO THIS STANDARD WARRANTY POLICY STATEMENT, FOR ANY AND ALL CLAIMS WILL NOT IN THE AGGREGATE EXCEED THE ACTUAL
AMOUNTS RECEIVED BY HARRIS FOR THE SPECIFIC PRODUCT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH SUCH CLAIM IS MADE.
GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION
1.
Applicable Law, Venue and Jurisdiction. This Standard Warranty Policy Statement, and any disputes related hereto, shall be governed by and
interpreted in accordance with the laws of the state of Florida, USA, regardless of any law principles requiring the application of any other law. The
parties agree that the exclusive venue for any action related to the dispute or interpretation of this Standard Warranty Policy Statement shall be in the
courts with the appropriate jurisdiction located in Orlando, Florida, and each party irrevocably submits to the jurisdiction of each such court in any such
action and waives any objection it may now or hereafter have to venue or personal jurisdiction in each such court. The prevailing party in any action
related to the dispute or interpretation of this Standard Warranty Policy Statement shall be entitled to recover its reasonable attorneys fees incurred in
pursuing the action, including those fees incurred throughout all bankruptcy and appellate proceedings.
2.
Jury Waiver. THE PARTIES FURTHER AGREE, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, TO WAIVE ALL RIGHTS TO A TRIAL BY JURY OF ANY ACTION
RELATING TO THE DISPUTE OR INTERPRETATION OF THIS STANDARD WARRANTY POLICY STATEMENT, WHETHER SOUNDING IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR
OTHERWISE. THE PARTIES SPECIFICALLY ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THIS WAIVER IS MADE KNOWINGLY AND VOLUNTARILY AFTER AN ADEQUATE
OPPORTUNITY TO NEGOTIATE ITS TERMS.
2
Installation
T
The RMXdigital console shipment contains:
he RMXdigital mainframe“drops into”
• The 12, 20 or 28 input mainframe with a Monitor Control panel, a KSU card, and the DSP
a cutout (as shown below) in the furniture coun-
cards installed with the optional items ordered
(Universal Dual Fader Panels, Blank Panels,
tertop.
8-Input Expansion Cards)
The console card cage, which extends below the
• 2 RU rackmount 48-volt power supply
console, can be positioned to fall within the cabinet or above a cable tray.
• Installation and tool kits (AMP MOD IV con-
The low-profile Reflective Display (footprint:
nector housings and receptacle contacts, crimp
17.25" x 5.25") is only 5” tall. It can set behind
and contact removal tools, hex driver, backup
the frame or on top of the rear cover. If the op-
batteries, removable clear lenses and clear in-
tional Tall Console Display is used, it stands on
sert sheet), two 48 VDC power cables, and CD-
the countertop behind the frame (its footprint: 14"
ROM
x 6", and it stands 11” tall).
• Stand alone Console Display with integral cable
Locate a 3" cable grommet near the display to
and power supply
route the 6-foot cable harness thru the countertop
in order to plug into the back of the frame.
Console, back view
COUNTERTOP
22"
[559]
1.5"
[38]
1.75"
2.50"
[44]
[64]
12.5"
2.75"
1.5"
[317.5]
[70]
[38]
9.75"
[248]
Console, side view, with dimensions
Dimension Table
A
B
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
RMXdigital-12 27.4" [696]
26.1" [662]
26.25" [668]
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
RMXdigital-20 40.2" [1021]
38.9" [987]
39.25" [993]
19.25" 123456789012345678901234567890121234567
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
FURNITURE CUTOUT
[489] 123456789012345678901234567890121234567
RMXdigital-28 53.0" [1346]
51.7" [1312]
52.0" [1320]
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
Millimeter dimensions in brackets. All dimensional tolerances are: +¼"
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
[6.4], -0" [0.0]. Typical setback from countertop edge to the front of
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
123456789012345678901234567890121234567
the console: 6" [152] to 12" [305].
Mainframe
RMXdigital-4
14.6" [371]
13.3" [337]
C
13.5" [343]
C
2-1
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
FRAME CONFIGURATION
Console Installation
Two panels are available for the RMXdigital:
To simplify console installation, logic cable wir-
the Universal Dual Fader Input and the Monitor
ing diagrams for specific peripheral equipment are
Control, which is standard on the mainframe. The
available from Harris Technical Support. Refer to
Dual Fader panel is two input slots wide, while
page 5-1 for contact information.
the Monitor Control panel is three slots wide. Typical panel positions are shown below, but panels
INSTALLATION NOTE: Do not position the con-
can be positioned up to two slots from their stan-
sole near intense electromagnetic hum fields such
dard slot designations since each panel connects
as those created by audio amplifiers that use in-
to the mainframe using a single red CAT-5 cable.
expensive power transformers operating in or near
Input slots can have any combination of Dual
saturation. Strong electromagnetic fields may im-
Fader panels, single or dual width blank panels,
pair the performance of the RMXdigital and neigh-
single or dual width divider kits, or custom switch/
boring equipment. Route audio cables to achieve
control panels installed.
maximum practical distance from all AC power
Contact a Harris sales representative for more
mains wiring.
details on available RMXdigital options.
RMXdigital-12, Frame Configuration
99-2667 DSP Card *
99-2665 8-Input Expansion Card (optional)
80-1846 Blank Panel
Input Slots:
NO
TE: The number of available input slots equals the console
NOTE:
model number (e.g., RMXd-20 has 20 input slots). All RMXdigital
frames have one KSU card with DSP for the buses, four input
channels and four special purpose phantom channels. Each DSP
card adds the DSP for another eight input channels (e.g., RMXd4 has no DSP card, RMXd-12 has one DSP card, RMXd-20 has
two DSP cards, and RMXd-28 has three DSP cards).
The RMXd Divider Kit allows standard Harris/PR&E Turret
Accessory Panels to be installed in a frame. There are two kits
Input Slot 12
Input Slot 11
Input Slot 10
Input Slot 9
Input Slot 8
Input Slot 7
Input Slot 6
Input Slot 5
Input Slot 4
Input Slot 3
Input Slot 2
Input Slot 1
99-1407 Universal Dual Fader panels
take up two input slots, so there can be
up to six in a 12-input slot mainframe.
Remaining input slots are covered with
99-1410 Dual Width Blank Panels.
available: 99-1411-1 is one input slot wide and holds one or
two single width turret panels; 99-1411-2 is two input slots wide
and holds two dual width panels, four single width panels, or a
combination thereof. A kit can be installed into any input slot
location. Dual Fader panels or the Monitor Control panel can be
moved left or right one or two slots to accommodate a divider kit.
Blank turret panels 99-1714-3 (1.6" x 6") or 99-1740-3 (3.2"
x 6") cover unused accessory panel openings when using the
divider kit.
2-2
H A R R I S
99-1409 Single Width Blank Panel (standard)
The DSP, KSU and 8-Input Exp. cards are hidden below a card access cover.
* The number of DSP Cards installed is determined by the frame size.
** The 99-2672-1 KSU Card comes standard in all frame sizes.
99-1406 Monitor Control Panel (one standard)
with Session, Control Room
and Studio Monitor Controls
99-2672-1 or 99-2672-2 KSU Card **
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
Setting Dual Fader Panel Rotary Switches
Each Dual Fader panel’s specific operations and
Determine which channels will be designated
functions are established through the settings in
as Telco channels (up to six can be assigned) and
the init.mac file and the current session file.
which channel(s) should be assigned as the con-
In general, Dual Fader channels are divided into
trol room talkback source(s).
two types: VistaMax control channels and Telco
Typically, the Telco channels are grouped to-
channels—which can also function as VistaMax
gether but they do not have to be. For ease of con-
router control channels, but which have a special
figuration and system troubleshooting, however,
IFB or mix-minus output assigned to each Telco
it is best to number the Telco channels in order
channel. Each channel in a frame comes standard
from left to right in the frame (e.g. set Telco 1 as
as a VistaMax control channel, but only up to six
the left-most Telco channel, then set Telco 2 as the
channels can be uniquely identified as Telco chan-
next one to the right, and so on).
nels. The Telco channels are readily apparent by
Determine which channels will typically have
their lighted Talkback buttons.
the control room mics routed to them that may
Each channel’s functions are also configured by
need to talk to the Telco mix-minus outputs, to
the selected source signal. When a mic input is
the studio and to an external location. This is typi-
the source, the channel strip becomes a mic chan-
cally the board operator’s mic and a producer mic,
nel (which means it may be controlled by a mic
but any number of mics could be assigned. If the
remote panel, it may mute outputs and trigger a
CR mics are dedicated to certain channels, than
warning lamp output when On). When a periph-
only those channels would need to be set to 7. If
eral device is the source, the channel becomes a
complete flexibility is required, every channel—
line input channel (which means it may control,
except for the Telco channels, could be set to 7.
and be controlled by, the peripheral device).
Telco Channel
Number and Talk
Channel Select
Switch for the left
channel strip
The six mix-minus outputs in a console can be
assigned to any six channels in the frame through
rotary switch settings on each Dual Fader panel.
Telco Channel
Number and Talk
Channel Select
Switch for the right
channel strip
NOTE: Either or both channel strips on a Dual
Fader panel can be set as a Telco input channel,
but only six total channels can be set as the six
RJ-45
unique Telco channels on the console.
The remaining channels in the mainframe must
have their rotary switches set to either 0 or 7. The
0 setting (the default setting for each channel) identifies it as a VistaMax control channel. The 7 setPROM
ting identifies that channel as being available to
be a source for control room talkback audio.
The talkback function only becomes active when
a control room mic is set as the channel’s source
and that channel’s rotary switch is set to 7.
Dual Fader Panel, bottom view
2-3
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
Program 1 Meter
Remove the Dual Fader panels that need to have
Auxiliary Meter
their rotary switches changed (from the default 0
settings) from the mainframe (see page 5-3 for
panel removal instructions).The console power can
be left on while unplugging and reconnecting the
Dual Fader panels.
Unplug the red CAT-5 cable from the panel and
turn the panel over. Several openings—for the RJ45 jack, two rotary switches and the PROM, are
Clock set
switches
(on bottom)
on the back cover (shown on the previous page).
The two rotary switches are labeled 0 - 7 with
an arrow indicating the currently selected num-
Event
Timer
Clock
Original RMXd Console Display
ber. The upper switch sets the Telco number or
CR mic setting for the left channel strip. The lower
Program 1 Meter Auxiliary Meter
Clock
switch sets the Telco number or CR mic setting for
the right channel strip. If a channel strip is not a
Telco channel or a possible CR talk source, set the
Event
Timer
Clock set
switches
(recessed)
switch to 0.
Change the rotary switch to position 1 to set
that channel strip as Telco 1; to position 2 to set
that channel strip as Telco 2; and so on up to po-
Low-Profile Reflective Display
sition 6 which sets that channel strip as Telco 6.
Change the rotary switch to position 7 for those
channels that will have the control room talkback
and the original display (90-1950) is available as
mic as a source.
a special order.The 90-1950 is powered by a sepa-
Once the Dual Fader panel’s rotary switches are
rate 5-volt wall-wart supply (included) that plugs
set, plug the red CAT-5 cable back into the RJ-45
into the back of the display. The low-profile dis-
connector and refasten each panel to the main-
play uses 48 VDC from the console. Each display
frame. Verify that all channels set as Telco chan-
has a captive six-foot umbilical cable to carry the
nels have lighted Talkback buttons. If desired, the
meter signals, meter name display data and timer
Talkback button cover can be replaced by a clear
control wires. These cables plug into keyed con-
cover and a label to identify each Telco channel.
nectors on the back of the mainframe.
There are no other adjustments or settings re-
Two horizontal stereo bargraph meters, with al-
quired on the Dual Fader panels.
phanumeric displays (PROGRAM 1, CUE, etc.)
to identify the signals, a slaveable clock, and an
CONSOLE DISPLAY
event timer, are provided on each display.
Two console displays are available: the original
The meters provide simultaneous level moni-
tall direct-view display (90-1950) and the low-
toring of the Program 1 bus on the left-hand meter
profile reflective display (99-1975-1). Each is po-
and another bus or system signal on the right-
sitioned on the countertop behind the back of the
hand Auxiliary Meter. The Aux Meter buttons on
mainframe. The 99-1975-1 is supplied standard
the Monitor Control panel select the source for
2-4
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
the right-hand meter, which switches to display
an ESE or SMPTE master clock, the clock runs
the cue bus level while Cue is active.
off its internal oscillator. Both display colons flash
The meter display mode (average only or aver-
to indicate ESE timecode is not detected.
age and peak) is set by an init.mac file setting
Manually Setting the Clock
(which is edited using the VMCC program). The
(Original Display, bottom, left side)
level where the blue peak indicators turn on is set
via internal DIP switches on the meter display
boards. To change these settings, the rear/bottom
cover of the Console Display must be removed.
Hold
The 12/24-hour digital clock can be slaved to
Slow
Fast
(Reflective Display, top, right side)
an ESE (or SMPTE in the low profile display)
master clock. An extender cable is provided in the
display umbilical cabling for the original display
Hold
Slow
Fast
so that an ESE cable can be connected at the back
of the frame. On the reflective display, an ESE or
SMPTE cable plugs into a clock board connector.
See page 6-3 for details on master clock cabling.
Setting Console Display DIP Switches
The event timer is controlled manually, through
buttons on the Monitor Control panel, or auto-
To change DIP switch settings on the meters,
matically, through channel On timer reset com-
timer or clock requires that the rear or bottom
mands.
cover be removed to access the various printed
circuit assemblies (PCAs) in the display.
Setting The Clock
The clock can operate in autonomous or slave
SAFETY NOTE: Even though the
mode. When used autonomously (the factory pre-
switches can be changed with power
set), a quartz crystal oscillator controls clock tim-
applied, for safety, turn off the console
ing. After power is applied, set the clock manually
supply (and unplug the 5-volt wall wart
to the current time using a nonconductive tool
on the original display) before remov-
(wooden swab, toothpick, etc.) to press the recessed
ing the cover. Do not touch any compo-
time-set switches (bottom left of the original dis-
nents on the PCAs, other than the DIP
play, top right on the reflective display).
switches, as shown in this section.
• Press Fast to increment time by minutes at
a time.
Lay the display facedown on a padded surface
• Press Slow to increment time by seconds
(on the reflective display remove the reflector be-
at a time.
fore doing this) to remove the rear/bottom cover.
• Press and hold Hold to freeze the clock to
On the original display the Main Meter is the up-
synch it to a time reference. Set the time
per right PCA, the Aux Meter is the upper left
slightly ahead of the reference time. Release
PCA, the clock is the lower right PCA, and the
Hold to start the clock.
timer is the lower left PCA. On the reflective dis-
NOTE: When slave mode is selected (see Clock
play there are only two boards: a clock-timer board
Settings), if the clock is not properly connected to
and a meter board.
2-5
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
Clock Option Switches (DS1)
SWITCH 1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
SWITCH UP
DOWN 1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
Unused
Unused 1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
Unused
Unused 1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
ESE Disabled
ESE Enabled 1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
(Autonomous Mode)
(Slave Mode) 1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
TC89
TC90 1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
12-hour
24-hour 1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
Clock PCA
1234567890123456789012
1234567890123456789012
Clock Settings
The operating mode (autonomous, ESE slave
1 2
or SMPTE slave, which is only available on the
reflective display) and the clock display format (12or 24-hour display) are set using DIP switch DS1
3
on the clock PCA on the original meter and DS1
on the clock-timer PCA on the reflective meter.
4 5
For the switch settings see the illustrations for the
two displays on this and the next page.
Event Timer
The event timer displays time in minutes, seconds and tenths of seconds. The only timer option
Event Timer
Option Switches (DS1)
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
SWITCH UP
SWITCH DOWN
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
.1 sec display
.1 sec display12345678901234567890123456789
ON
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
OFF
Unused
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
Unused
Unused
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
Unused
Unused
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
Unused
Unused
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
12345678901234567890123456789
is whether the tenths of seconds digit is displayed
in Run mode. The tenths of seconds are always
1 2
shown in the Stop and Hold modes. For the switch
setting see the illustrations for the two displays
on this and the next page.
3
Meters
4
On the original display, each meter is set inde-
5
pendently. The Aux Meter is the left PCA, the Program 1 Meter is the right PCA (as viewed with the
rear cover removed). On the reflective display one
set of switches set the parameters for both meters.
Meter Switch DSW2 Definitions
The switches set these parameters: the level
where the blue peak indicators turn on; whether
peak hold is active or not; and whether average
and peak or average only is displayed.
On the original display, the Program 1 Meter
#
1
2
3
4
5
Switch Name
Peak Level
Peak Level
Display Mode
unused
Termination
DOWN Function
See Switch Table
See Switch Table
Peak hold active
UP Function
See Switch Table
See Switch Table
No Peak hold
Set (Main Meter)
None (Aux Meter)
has to have DSW2-5 set Down to terminate the
Switch Table
meter names data cable. A second DIP switch
DSW2, switch 1 and 2 set the level where the
Blue peak LEDs light.
1
2
Peak Level
UP
UP
0 dB
DOWN
UP
-2 dB
UP
DOWN
-4 dB
DOWN
DOWN
-6 dB
(DSW1) assigns the meter names for each meter.
Make sure DSW1-1 is set On for the Aux Meter
and that DSW1-2 is set On for the Program 1
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
1 2 3 4 5
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
123456789012345678901234567890
Meter. All other DSW1 switches must be set to
Off. For the switch settings see the illustrations for
the two displays on this and the next page.
Meter Option Switch (DSW2)
2-6
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
2 Installation
DSW1
DSW1
Aux Meter PCA
Main Meter PCA
DSW2
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
UP
UP
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
UP
DOWN
DSW2
DS1
DS1
UP
UP
UP
UP
DOWN
DOWN
UP
UP
UP
UP
Timer PCA
Clock PCA
ORIGINAL DISPLAY SETUP CONTROLS, REAR COVER REMOVED
Pin 4 = +5 VDC
Meter Boards
Switch DS3 Settings
Clock & Event Timer Board
Switch DS1 Settings
Switch - Off Function / On Function
1 - Average & Peak / Average only
2 - 2 sec. Peak Hold / No Peak Hold
3 - Blue LED turn on level*
4 - Blue LED turn on level*
5 - NetWave / RMXdigital
6 - Display: mirrored /direct view
Switch - Off Function / On Function
1 - Timer .1 secs display / Timer .1 secs off
2 - ESE not used / ESE master clock
3 - unused
4 - 12-hour time / 24-hour time
5 - SMPTE not used / SMPTE master clock
6 - Display: mirrored / direct view
J4 SIGNALS
1 - TIMER RESET INPUT
2 - GROUND
3 - TIMER RESET OUTPUT
4 - GROUND
5 - ESE/SMPTE INPUT +
6 - ESE/SMPTE INPUT -
* Blue Peak LEDs turn on at:
-6 dBFS when both 3 and 4 are off
-4 dBFS when 3 is on and 4 is off
-2 dBFS when 3 is off and 4 is on
0 dBFS when both 3 and 4 are on
ON
OFF
(Default Settings)
ON
OFF
6
5
4
3
2
1
Wire insertion end view
(Default Settings)
Meter PCA
Clock-Timer PCA
REFLECTIVE DISPLAY SETUP CONTROLS, BOTTOM COVER REMOVED
2-7
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
POWER SUPPLY
DC GROUNDING NOTE: Do not
The 48-volt Power Supply (99-1205) requires
connect the audio or logic ground wir-
2 RU of rack space within the console cabinetry,
ing to the chassis of the power supply.
typically below and to the left or right of the console. The supply must be installed such that the
AC GROUNDING NOTE: Do not
keyed fifteen foot DC supply cable (90-1858-1) is
defeat the power cord “U” safety
not under any tension when routed through the
ground in any way. Doing so may cre-
cabinet. It locks into the Primary power connec-
ate a potentially dangerous condition
tor on the frame’s rear panel (see drawing below).
to the operator.
A second 99-1205 supply can be installed as a
GROUNDING AND SHIELDING
redundant supply since the console has an integral power coupler. It plugs into the Redundant
Connect the broadcast facility’s technical ground
power connector using a second power cable, sup-
to the RMXdigital mainframe, using the threaded
plied with the console mainframe.
insert provided on the rear of the chassis near the
power connectors. Use a 10-32 machine screw and
crimp lug to terminate the facility’s technical
99-1205 P
ower S
upply and
Po
Supply
Technic
al G
onnec
tions
echnical
Grr ound C
Connec
onnections
ground wire.
Connect audio cable shields at both the console
RMXdigital mainframe detail, rear, left lower
and the peripheral ends when all system components share a common ground potential and are
using isolated ground AC outlets tied individually
back to the main technical ground.
If isolated ground AC outlets are not available,
connect the cable shield at the console end only.
Shields should be floated (left unconnected) at the
peripheral device end. Ensure the peripheral devices connect to a clean ground through their
90-1858-1 Cable
power cords, or through separate ground wires to
no connection
the facility’s technical ground.
GROUNDING NOTE: The Power Supply chassis connects to the AC mains
safety or “U” ground wire.
48-Volt Power Supply, rear panel detail
AUDIO GROUND NOISES: Buzz
pickup is generally electrostatic—such
Threaded insert
for technical
ground wire
connection
Two 90-1858-1 cables ship
with the RMXdigital mainframe. Use one cable for the
primary 48-volt supply, use
the second one for a
redundant 48-volt supply.
as capacitive coupling between an audio line and an AC power line.To avoid
audio ground noises, do not route audio wires in the same wireway as an
AC power line.
2-8
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
BACKUP BATTERIES
Three AA rechargeable NiCad batteries (part of
the Tool Kit) supply a “Keep Alive” voltage to maintain the console assignments during momentary
power outages.
Do NOT install the batteries until the
console is powered 24/7 and is ready
for everyday use.
To install the backup batteries:
1 Open the card access cover.
2 Install the three batteries into the battery clip
located behind the KSU card on the frame.
Observe the polarity as marked on the battery clip, and shown below.
Backup Battery Polarity
NOTE: Check/replace the batteries yearly to
prevent leakage damage and ensure continuous
backup protection. Use only Panasonic P-50AAH
or equivalent batteries designed for continuous
slow charging. To prolong battery life and prevent
leakage damage, remove the batteries when leaving the console off for any extended period.
2-9
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C.1 • 12/10
I
O
N
2 Installation
Cabling and Wiring
needed is determined by the application.
Typically, cables with five or eight wires are
Before installing the RMXdigital console, cre-
most often used for constructing logic cables
ate a facility wiring plan to list the console inter-
since even though there are twelve or four-
connections with all peripheral devices. Identify
teen pins on the logic connectors, only a
and create tags for the audio and logic cabling.
handful are typically connected for any
List each connection in a master facility wiring
given application.
logbook to facilitate the wiring installation, any
• Crossover CAT-5e/6 cable to connect the
future system wiring changes, equipment updates,
KSU Facet connectors to a VistaMax frame.
and system troubleshooting.
• Straight-thru CAT-5 cable to connect the
Refer to the Quick Connection Guides, on pages
KSU Ethernet connector to a VistaMax sys-
2-18 to 2-24, for information on audio and logic
tem LAN switch.
connection. See page 2-13 for a block diagram for
each type of logic interface.
WIRE PREPARATION
All RMXd audio and logic wiring terminates in
CONNECTOR ACCESS
AMP MOD IV receptacle contacts at the console.
All audio, logic and data connections are made
Stranded wires, of 22 to 26 AWG with insulation
on plug-in connectors. They are hidden in normal
diameters of .040 to .060 inch, can be used with
operation below a card access cover that extends
the AMP MOD IV receptacle contacts.
across the console behind the user control panels.
Follow these steps for audio wire preparation:
To access the connectors, open up the card ac-
1 Strip the cable insulation jacket and foil shield
cess cover by lifting from the front using the thumb
back 1½" [38.10 mm].
catches on either end of the cover. It is hinged to
2 Remove the foil shield and sleeve the drain
open toward the rear and stay open.
wire with 20 AWG Teflon sleeving. Leave
Caution: Make sure the cover is fully open so
9/64" [3.57 mm] of the drain wire exposed.
that it does not accidentally fall shut.
3 Cover the cut end of the jacket with 3/4"
[19.05 mm] of heat-shrink tubing. Shrink this
REQUIRED CABLES AND WIRE
tubing, centered on the jacket cut end, to hold
The following types are required:
the drain wire sleeving in place.
• Analog audio connections require two-
4 Strip the signal wire insulation back 9/64"
conductor, stranded, insulated, shielded
[3.57 mm].
cable using a separate shield drain wire
5 Crimp the receptacle contact onto the wire
(equivalent to Belden 8451, 9451 or 8761).
and insulation.
• AES/EBU connections use 110 ohm two-
Audio C
able S
hielding N
ot
e: To follow recomCable
Shielding
Not
ote:
conductor, stranded, insulated, foil-shield
mended grounding procedures, the drain wires
cable containing a separate shield drain
must be sleeved with Teflon sleeving and heat
wire (equivalent to Belden 1800A).
shrink tubing must cover all cable jacket cut ends
• Logic control cables require stranded, 22
to insulate the shield wiring.
AWG, multiple-conductor, non-shielded,
Logic control cables are fabricated in a similar
jacketed cable (equivalent to Belden 9423,
manner to the audio wiring. Strip the jacket insu-
8457 or 9421). The number of conductors
lation back 1½" [38.10 mm], sleeve the cut end
2-10
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
Insulation
Crimping Barrel
9/64” [3.57 mm]
AMP MOD IV
Contact
Crimp Tool
Wire Crimping
Barrel
Properly
Crimped Contact
2 Insert the prepped wire into the contact until
the insulation hits the tool’s wire stop. Hold
the wire in place while squeezing the tool
handles to crimp the contact onto the wire.
AMP MOD IV Receptacle Contacts
The tool handles automatically release and
spring open after the crimp cycle is complete.
with 3/4" [19.05 mm] of shrink tubing and strip
the insulation from each wire 9/64" [3.57 mm].
Contact Holder,
snapped against
Crimp Tool
Printed
Side of
Crimp
Tool
AMP MOD IV
Receptacle Contacts
Die
3/4” [19.05 mm]
Wire
AMP MOD IV
Receptacle
Contact
Teflon Sleeving
Cable ID Tag
Audio Wire, ready for insertion into an
Insulation Stop
Anvils
Crimp Tool — Cutaway View
CRIMP TOOL OPERATION
Once the contact has been crimped, insert and
A ratcheting AMP crimp tool with contact holder
lock the contact receptacle into the appropri-
is included.The tool crimps both the insulation and
ate connector housing following the pinout
wire barrels on the AMP MOD IV receptacle con-
diagrams found on pages 2-10 (for audio) and
tact in one crimp. To use the ratcheting crimp tool:
2-13 (for logic).
1 Insert the contact into the contact holder with
the barrel openings up. Typically the middle
Contact Removal Tool
holder is used (for 20 - 24 AWG wire). Flip
the holder up so it magnetically latches against
Locking Tab Slots
the crimp tool. The end of the insulation barrel will be about 2 mm from the end of the
Locking Tab
die. Close the tool one click (only until the
anvil holds the contact in place, as shown in
Receptacle Contact,
Insertion & Removal Detail
the cutaway view, above.)
2-11
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
A receptacle contact is inserted into the hous-
Normal these signals to the appropriate analog
ing with its locking tab side toward the locking
inputs.
tab slots on the side of the connector housing. A
Likewise, the RMXdigital’s analog outputs may
slight click can be heard when the contact’s lock-
be routed through a patch bay normalled to stan-
ing tab springs up into the locking tab slot.
dard peripherals such as analog on-air processing
To remove a contact from a housing, the 70-
gear, recorders, telephone hybrids, etc.
129 Contact Removal Tool (included in the 76-
Each analog input is designed for line level (+4
1401 tool kit) is required. Insert the tool’s tip into
dBu). Session file settings allow any input to be
the locking tab slot and press the locking tab down
software level trimmed (by up to +/-15 dB) so that
while lightly pulling on the wire to remove the
unbalanced -10 dBv devices can be directly con-
contact from the housing.
nected to the console. Note that microphones must
be separately preamplified and processed before
AUDIO CONNECTIONS
being connected to the console.
Analog and digital audio connections take ad-
Stereo Analog Audio Connections
Line Input or Output — 6-Pin Housing
vantage of the three-pins per row design of the
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
AMP MOD IV housings. Three-pin housings are
used for digital connections and six-pin housings
are used for analog connections.
Digital & Analog Audio Connectors
1
2
3
6
5
3
2
4
1
6-pin Analog
connector
Signal Description
Shield for the left channel
Low (-), left channel
High (+), left channel
Shield for the right channel
Low (-), right channel
High (+), right channel
Two Mono Analog Connections
Line Input or Output — 6-Pin Connector
3-pin Digital
connector
Pin numbering, wire insertion end view,
KSU connector orientation
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
Audio wiring has this orientation:
• The audio shields connect on pins 1 and 4
• The audio low wires, typically black,
Signal Description
Shield for signal 1
Low (-) for signal 1
High (+) for signal 1
Shield for signal 2
Low (- ) for signal 2
High (+) for signal 2
connect to the middle pins (pins 2 and 5)
Digital Connections
• The audio high wires, typically red,
connect to pins 3 and 6
Three-pin digital inputs accept AES-3 (AES/
When inputs come from mono sources like mic
EBU) compatible signals with sample rates of 25
processors or hybrids, two separate signals can
to 50 kHz. Each digital input goes through sample
connect to each six-pin connector to maximize
rate conversion (the console’s internal sample rate
input connector usage.
is 48 kHz). In most cases, digital inputs can also
accept unbalanced S/PDIF signals. Refer to Un-
Analog Connections
balanced Connections on the next page for details.
There are no analog interstage patch points in
Each digital output is an AES-3 compatible sig-
the RMXdigital console. To use the console with a
nal. AES-3 outputs cannot connect directly to an
patch bay, connect line level analog outputs from
S/PDIF input. To do this requires a signal trans-
the peripheral devices directly to the patch bay.
lation interface.
2-12
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
AES/EBU Digital Inputs & Outputs
Pin
1
2
3
S/PDIF Signals
Signal Description
Shield (connects directly to the chassis)
Low (-)
High (+)
Digital devices with only an S/PDIF digital output can connect to an RMXdigital input, but only
if a 249 ohm resistor is used to impedance match
the S/PDIF cable. Install the resistor in the AMP
UNBALANCED CONNECTIONS
MOD IV housing per the following illustration.
Although all analog inputs and outputs are
Connecting an S/PDIF Device to
an RMXdigital AES/EBU Input
active and balanced, unbalanced consumer or
From
S/PDIF
Device
“semipro” equipment can be connected to the console. For best results, connect an unbalanced device through an IHF-PRO match box and keep
Signal
the unbalanced cable lengths as short as possible.
3
2
Shield
If a match box is not available, connect an un-
1
249 ohm resistor
balanced device directly to a RMXdigital input
using the following illustration.
An unbalanced-to-balanced line transformer can
alternately be used to interface an S/PDIF signal.
Connecting an Unbalanced Stereo Device
to an RMXdigital Analog Input
From the
Unbalanced
Device
R
Console
Balanced
Input
L
3 6
2 5
1 4
Shields
Console
AES/EBU
Input
Note 1: A signal conversion interface must be
used to connect an AES/EBU output to a S/PDIF
input.
Note 2: Some S/PDIF signals may not work with
the RMXdigital’s inputs, even with the additional
load resistor or a transformer, because of nonstandard levels or protocols in the S/PDIF product.
When an unbalanced device must be connected
to an RMXdigital balanced analog output, and
RMXDIGITAL SAMPLE RATE
an IHF-PRO match box is not available, do not
The RMXdigital uses the professional audio
tie the low (-) and shield pins together to “unbal-
sample rate of 48 kHz for all its internal audio
ance” the signal. The low output pin must always
mixing and routing. Each digital input has an in-
be left floating when unbalancing an RMXdigital
tegral sample rate converter to convert sample
output, as shown in the following illustration.
rates from 25 to 50 kHz to the console’s internal
Connecting an Unbalanced Device
to an RMXdigital Analog Output
48 kHz sample rate.
The console’s digital outputs are fixed at 48 kHz,
(Nominal Output is -2 dBu)
To the
Console
Unbalanced
Balanced
Device
Output
L
except for PGM 1, PGM 2, Send, and KSU Outputs A and B. Each can be set for 44.1 kHz in the
init.mac file (see Chapter 4 for how to change
the sample rates on these outputs).
3 6
2 5
1 4
R
When the console is used in a stand-alone application, the console cannot be locked to an ex-
Shields
ternal time reference.To accomplish this, the RMX(Make no connections to pins 2 & 5)
digital must be networked in a VistaMax system
2-13
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
LOGIC CONNECTORS
(the RMXdigital is then automatically synchro-
The RMXdigital console has the following logic
nized to the VistaMax system’s master clock).
An external AES-3 digital reference signal
connections:
(48 kHz, ±100 ppm) can connect to the master
• Assignable Logic I/O (three on the KSU
Hub card in a VistaMax frame. Refer to the Vis-
and eight on each 8-Input Expansion card).
taMax manual (75-52) for details.
• Control Room logic for warning light, external mute, dim, and talkback control.
AUDIO CONNECTIONS
• Studio logic for warning light, external
mute, dim, and talkback control.
There are eighteen dedicated analog and digital outputs on the KSU card (see pg 2-19) for the
• Cue/Talk/External logic from a remote cue
bus outputs (PGM 1-PGM 4 and Send), monitor
logic input; a remote timer reset output; an
outputs for the control room and a studio, three
external location mute, dim and talk com-
Talkback audio-only outputs, a mono cue output,
mands; and an external talk to CR logic
and four analog and four digital routable outputs.
input.
There are also four analog and four digital in-
Page 2-13 has block diagrams for the four types
puts on the KSU. The signals on these connectors
of logic interfaces. All logic inputs and outputs
are routed to channel strips by session file com-
are opto-isolated through opto-couplers on their
mands or by “dialing” them up using the Dual
inputs and solid state relays on their outputs. The
Fader panel source selectors. During console con-
inputs handle logic from +5 to +40 volts. The out-
figuration, the inputs can also be made available
puts are solid-state “dry-contact relays” that can
to any VistaMax device in the network.
switch up to 60 volts, AC or DC.
The eight routable outputs can have dedicated
The CR, Studio and Cue/Talk/Ext. logic con-
signals routed to them in the init.mac file; by
nectors are dedicated to the functions that are
assigning a signal in a session file; or they can be
shown in the block diagrams. There are no soft
assigned as a destination controlled by a VistaMax
configurations required on these connections.
The Assignable Logic I/O connectors have de-
source selector.
Each routable connector defaults to stereo link-
fault logic functions, as shown throughout this
ing, but any analog input or output connector can
manual, but the logic inputs have additional func-
be set to function as a two mono outputs. See Chap-
tions that can be substituted for the default set-
ter 4 for more information on stereo versus mono
tings during configuration using VMCC.
An Assignable Logic connector can be “bound”
signals.
Additional audio inputs are available on all
or associated to an audio connector. On the KSU
frame sizes, except the RMXd-4, by adding one
Card, audio input A is typically connected to the
or more optional 8-Input Expansion Cards. One
Board Operator’s mic preamp and hence does not
8-Input Expansion card can be added to each DSP
have a logic connector associated with it, thus the
Card. The cards have eight audio inputs and eight
three Assignable Logic I/O connectors are labeled:
logic I/O connections. Card DIP switches set each
B, C and D since they are associated with KSU
audio input as an analog or a digital input. The
audio inputs B, C and D. Thus, if audio input B
eight logic connectors are associated with one of
connects to CD1, CD1’s logic would connect to
the audio connections, as detailed in the next sec-
the B Logic I/O connector. Likewise, audio inputs
tion.
C and D are associated with the C and D Logic
2-14
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
Control Room Logic Interface,
Connector Pinout and Block Diagram
4 Control Room Warning Relay
5 Control Room Warning Relay
12 Control Room Dim Relay
Enable Logic Inputs (+)
14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Wire insertion end view
1 - LOGIC GND
2 - LOGIC GND
3 - LOGIC GND
4 - WARNING RELAY
5 - WARNING RELAY
6 - +5 VOLT LOGIC SUPPLY
7 - +5 VOLT LOGIC SUPPLY
Internal Logic
11 Control Room Mute Relay
Ctrl Room Mute Input (-) 8
8 - MUTE C/R (-)
9 - DIM C/R (-)
10 - RELAYS COMMON
11 - MUTE RELAY
12 - DIM RELAY
13 - TALK TO C/R RELAY
14 - ENABLE LOGIC INPUTS (+)
Ctrl Room Dim Input (-)
9
13 Talk to Control Room Relay
Notes:
Opto-Isolated inputs are current limited to work
with +5 to +40 VDC logic.
10 Relays Common
7 Logic Supply +5VDC
6 Logic Supply +5VDC
Opto-Isolated outputs can sink up to 60 volts or
350 mA max. current flow.
1 Logic Ground
2 Logic Ground
3 Logic Ground
For fully isolated operation, do not connect external
devices to +5 or ground (pins 1, 2, 3, 6 and 7).
Studio Logic Interface,
Connector Pinout and Block Diagram
4 Studio Warning Relay
5 Studio Warning Relay
12 Studio Dim Relay
Enable Logic Inputs (+)
14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Wire insertion end view
1 - LOGIC GND
2 - LOGIC GND
3 - LOGIC GND
4 - WARNING RELAY
5 - WARNING RELAY
6 - +5 VOLT LOGIC SUPPLY
7 - +5 VOLT LOGIC SUPPLY
8 - MUTE STUDIO (-)
9 - DIM STUDIO (-)
10 - RELAYS COMMON
11 - MUTE RELAY
12 - DIM RELAY
13 - TALK TO STUDIO RELAY
14 - ENABLE LOGIC INPUTS (+)
Studio Mute Input (-)
8
Studio Dim Input (-)
9
Internal Logic
11 Studio Mute Relay
13 Talk to Studio Relay
Notes:
Opto-Isolated inputs are current limited to work
with +5 to +40 VDC logic.
10 Relays Common
7 Logic Supply +5VDC
6 Logic Supply +5VDC
Opto-Isolated outputs can sink up to 60 volts or
350 mA max. current flow.
1 Logic Ground
2 Logic Ground
3 Logic Ground
For fully isolated operation, do not connect external
devices to +5 or ground (pins 1, 2, 3, 6 and 7).
Cue/Talk/External Logic Interface,
Connector Pinout and Block Diagram
4 External Timer Reset
7 External Dim Relay
Enable Logic Inputs (+)
3 4 5 6
9 10 11 12
7 - EXTERNAL DIM RELAY
8 - +5 VOLT LOGIC SUPPLY
9 - LOGIC GND
10 - ENABLE LOGIC INPUTS (+)
11 - EXT TALK TO C/R (-)
12 - REMOTE CUE (-)
Assignable Logic Interface,
Connector Pinout and
Block Diagram, default signals
1 2
7 8
3 4 5 6
9 10 11 12
Wire insertion end view
1 - LOGIC GND
2 - TALK TO C/R / CUE (-)
3 - OFF (-)
4 - ENABLE LOGIC INPUTS (+)
5 - OFF TALLY / STOP PULSE
6 - TALLY & PULSE COMMON
Ext Cue On Input (-)
12
Ext Talk to CR Input (-)
11
3 Relays Common
Opto-Isolated outputs can sink up to 60 volts or
350 mA max. current flow.
1 Logic Supply +5VDC
8 Logic Supply +5VDC
For fully isolated operation, do not connect external
devices to +5 or ground (pins 1, 2, 8, and 9).
2 Logic Ground
9 Logic Ground
Enable Logic Inputs (+)
4
On (-)
9
Off (-)
3
MIC: Cough (-)
LINE: Ready (-)
8
MIC: Talk To C/R (-)
LINE: Cue (-)
2
7 - +5 VOLT LOGIC SUPPLY
8 - COUGH / READY (-)
9 - ON (-)
10 - +5 VOLT LOGIC SUPPLY
11 - ON TALLY / START PULSE
12 - +5 VOLT LOGIC SUPPLY
Notes:
Opto-Isolated inputs are current limited to work
with +5 to +40 VDC logic.
Opto-Isolated outputs can sink up to 60 volts or
350 mA max. current flow.
For fully isolated operation, do not connect external
devices to +5 or ground (pins 1, 7, 10, and 12).
2-15
H A R R I S
5 Talk to External Relay
Notes:
Opto-Isolated inputs are current limited to work
with +5 to +40 VDC logic.
Internal Logic
Wire insertion end view
1 - +5 VOLT LOGIC SUPPLY
2 - LOGIC GND
3 - RELAYS COMMON
4 - TIMER RESET
5 - TALK TO EXT. RELAY
6 - EXTERNAL MUTE RELAY
6 External Mute Relay
Internal Logic
1 2
7 8
10
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
11
MIC: On Tally Relay
LINE: Start Pulse Relay
5
MIC: Off Tally Relay
LINE: Stop Pulse Relay
6 Tally & Pulse Common
7 Logic Supply +5VDC
10 Logic Supply +5VDC
12 Logic Supply +5VDC
1 Logic Ground
2 Installation
connectors. The “binding” of the audio and logic
that must be tied to +5 to +40 volts through the
connections is set using VMCC which is covered
Enable Logic Inputs pin.
Most outputs are isolated solid-state relay con-
in chapter 4, RMXdigital Server and in Appendix
tacts commoned to one pin. The exceptions are
A, VMCC.
the two warning relay outputs which are isolated
CONNECTION QUICK GUIDES
dry contacts. The common pin can tie to ground
(for low logic outputs) or to a logic voltage of up
Pages 2-18 to 2-24 have Quick Guides covering
to 60 volts at 350 mA (for high logic outputs).
the connections for each card or component along
with audio and logic connector pinouts and sig-
Several +5 volt supply and ground pins are avail-
nal descriptions. Logic block diagrams are shown
able on each connector, but these should only be
on page 2-13. Here are the Quick Guide pages:
used to power isolated control panels. Ground and
logic voltages should always be sourced from the
• Frame and Console Display: page 2-18
peripheral device to maintain isolated operation.
• KSU card: pages 2-19 thru 2-22
• 8-Input Expansion card: page 2-23
Control Room Logic
• VistaMax connections: page 2-24
This 14-pin connector has two isolated relay
contacts (pins 4 and 5) for controlling a warning
Pages 2-25 to 2-27 show examples of typical
lamp interface like the Harris WL-2. It is activated
logic connections to the Assignable Logic connec-
when any channel with a control room mic as its
tors from a mic remote control panel, a CD player
source is turned On. This action will also mute the
and a digital delivery system.
Control Room Monitor audio output.
The other three logic outputs (commoned to-
Note: For complete isolation of the console and
gether on pin 10) are: CR dim on pin 12 (typically
a peripheral device, use only the opto-isolated con-
activated when receiving talkback), CR mute on
trol connections. Both logic ground and +5 VDC
pin 11 (activated when the warning output is ac-
are referenced to the console’s power supply and
tive), and talkback on pin 13 (activated by receiv-
ground and should only be connected to isolated
ing Talk to CR logic). These outputs can be used
devices like mic control panels or other Harris
to control external speaker switching circuitry or
Accessory Panels. Connecting logic ground to a
be used for tally indicators.
non-isolated device may result in a ground loop
There are two external logic inputs for remotely
between the console and the peripheral device.
dimming monitors (on pin 9) or muting the monitors (on pin 8). To use these inputs, pin 14 must
LOGIC INTERFACE
be tied high (+5 to +40 VDC). The logic inputs are
Logic connector pinouts and block diagrams for
triggered by being pulled low.
the four types of logic connections on the RMX-
digital (Control Room, Studio, Cue/Talk, Assign-
Studio Logic
able) are shown on page 2-13.
This 14-pin connector has the same connections
Logic inputs are shown on the left side and logic
as the control room connector, except they’re for
outputs are shown on the right side of the block
a talk studio or voice room. There are two isolated
diagrams. Logic inputs, noted by the (-) symbol,
relay contacts (pins 4 and 5) for controlling a warn-
are active low. They are isolated by opto-couplers
ing lamp interface like the Harris WL-2. It is acti2-16
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
vated when any channel with a studio mic as its
channel strip while tally outputs control the but-
source is turned On.
ton tallies in sync with the channel strip buttons.
The other three logic outputs (commoned to-
The init.mac or the active session file sets the
gether on pin 10) are for studio dim (pin 12), stu-
binding for the Assignable connector logic (to as-
dio mute (pin 11), and studio talkback (pin 13).
sociate it with the mic’s audio input).
These can be used to control external speaker
When assigned as a line input, the functions for
pins 2, 5, 8 and 11 can be set to interface periph-
switching or be used for tally indicators.
There are two external logic inputs for remotely
eral devices. Pin 2 typically is set as a remote cue
dimming the studio monitors (on pin 9) or for
switch input that can be triggered by a digital de-
muting the studio monitors (on pin 8).To use these
livery system or from a studio or producer cue
inputs pin 14 must be tied high (+5 to +40 VDC).
switch. Pin 8 typically is set as a ready logic input
The logic inputs are triggered by being pulled low.
that is used by a peripheral device to turn off the
channel audio as well as control the off button
Cue/Talk/External Logic
illumination to indicate that an event has been
completed.
This 12-pin connector has a remote cue logic
input (pin 12) and an External Talk to C/R logic
Pins 11 and 5 typically are set as start and stop
input (pin 11). To use these inputs pin 10 must be
outputs to automatically start or stop/pause a pe-
tied high (+5 to +40 VDC). The logic inputs are
ripheral device when the channel is turned on or
triggered by being pulled low.
off. These typically generate single 220 msec con-
Four logic outputs (commoned together on pin
tact closures between pin 6 and pin 5 or 11, but
3) are for an external location dim (pin 7), mute
they can also be set to output additional pulses
(pin 6), and talkback (pin 5). These can control
for each button press, or be set to output sustained
external speaker switching or tally indicators. The
contact closures. These choices are set in the
fourth logic output is used to reset an Event Timer
init.mac file or by the current session file.
(pin 4) in a studio or an external location.
Microphone Logic
Assignable Logic
Microphone logic has three main functions:
There are three of these 12-pin connectors on
mute the monitor speakers in the room with a“hot”
the KSU (labeled B, C, D). Additional Assignable
mic; command a hot mic warning light; and acti-
Logic connectors can be added by installing one
vate mic logic functions like talkback and cough.
or more optional 8-Input Expansion Cards (not
The warning commands come from the control
available on the RMXd-4).
room or studio logic connectors, but it is the ses-
Each Assignable Logic I/O connector is typi-
sion file settings for the Universal Dual Fader In-
cally connected to either a remote mic control
put panels that tell the monitor logic that a cer-
panel (using Mic logic) or to a peripheral device
tain input is a mic and where that mic is located
(using Line logic). Mic logic is primarily used when
(control room, studio, or an external site). Setting
the audio input that the logic connector is assigned
a Universal input as a mic input is done in the
to is set to mute a control room, studio or exter-
session file by setting its Room Code, a VistaMax
nal location.
system function that assigns each room in the facility a code used to identify where a mic is lo-
A remote control panel is connected to an As-
cated in the VistaMax system.
signable connector so its buttons can control a
2-17
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
On button and the Off Tally (pin 5) drives the LEDs
Mic Connections
Microphones must be preamplified to line level
in the Off button. The other LEDs (Cough and
before being connected to an RMXdigital audio
Talkback) connect to +5 Volts. Switches and LEDs
input. Typically, mics are routed through a mic
are commoned to Logic Ground (pin 1).
processor to preamplify, equalize, and compress
To make a custom mic panel, use SPST (single
or limit the audio. The mic processor output then
pole, single throw) momentary contact switches
connects to an analog or digital input.
with LED or lamp indicators. Lamps must be 6.3
If there is a mic control panel associated with
volt type with a current draw of under 50 mA. Tie
the mic, then it is wired to an Assignable Logic
one side of each switch and lamp to Logic Com-
connector and that logic connector is “bound” or
mon (pin 1). The other side of the Cough and Talk-
associated with the mic audio input connector in
back lamps are tied together to +5 volts.
VMCC. This means that regardless of which chan-
Each switch is tied to its logic counterpart (the
nel strip the mic is assigned to, the logic signals
On switch goes to the On (-) input, pin 9, the Off
are routed with the audio.
switch goes to Off (-) input, pin 3, etc. The on/off
lamps are tied to their Tally outputs (On lamp to
When the console is part of a VistaMax system,
On Tally, pin 11; Off lamp to Off Tally, pin 5).
then the mic audio and panel logic could be assigned to, or come from, a completely different
Tally Common (pin 6) is jumpered to +5 Volts
console or VistaMax frame. This allows easy shar-
(pin 12). Pin 4, Enable Logic Inputs (+), is also
ing of a common voicing studio between two or
jumpered to +5 Volts on pin 10.
more consoles, with only one physical connection
Assignable Logic I/O and Peripherals
of the mic processor and mic control panel.
For additional networked audio information, see
Peripheral devices are controlled through Start
the VistaMax manual (75-52). For information on
and Stop Commands. These commands can be set
software setup of the console features see Chapter
to output a single 220 msec pulse, multiple pulses
4, which covers using the VMCC program.
(additional pulses with each button press), or they
can be set for sustained logic.
In the basic logic connection example on page
Mic Logic To/From a RMXdigital
Two mic control panels are available for the
2-26, active low logic is used, thus Tally & Pulse
RMXdigital: PRE99-1197 (On, Off, Cough) and
Common is connected to the logic ground on the
PRE99-1198 (On, Off, Cough and Talkback). Ei-
peripheral device (labeled Command Common on
ther one connects to the Assignable Logic I/O con-
the Denon CD player in the example).
nector that is bound to the mic audio input. A
In the complex logic example shown on page
wiring diagram of the interconnect wiring (90-
2-27, active high logic is used, thus Tally & Pulse
1875) is shown on page 2-17.
Common connects to +5 VDC.
The remote control switches (On, Off, Cough,
Note: This voltage is more typically supplied
Talkback) connect to the four remote inputs on
directly by the peripheral device in order to
pins 2, 3, 8 and 9. Pin 4 is jumpered to pin 10 to
prevent ground loops, but in this example the pe-
enable the external inputs.
ripheral has isolated connections as well.
The switch LEDs connect to pins 5, 7 and 11
Peripheral devices control the channel strip
with pin 1 supplying a ground connection. The
through the Ready logic input. The Ready logic
On Tally output (pin 11) drives the LEDs in the
performs both an audio reset, which turns off the
2-18
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
channel, then controls the off LED illumination,
The frame has two connectors for the Console
when Ready control is active for that channel.
Display’s umbilical cable. These carry the timer
Otherwise, the off LEDs turn on automatically at
control wires, the digital bargraph meter signals
channel off.
and the meter legend display data. Signal infor-
For devices requiring a steady on or off tally
mation for these connections is shown below.
rather than pulses, the logic can be set to do so
using VMCC.
Additional Logic Connections
An external event timer reset command is on
the Cue/Talk/Ext connector (pin 4). It connects
to a studio or external location Event Timer so it
can be reset by the console timer reset logic.
99-1197 or 99-1198
MIC CONTROL PANEL
ASSIGNABLE
LOGIC CONNECTOR
SIGNAL
PIN
Logic Ground
1
Off Tally
5
On Tally
11
+5 VDC Supply
7
Off Switch (-)
3
On Switch (-)
9
Cough Switch (-)
8
Talk Switch (-)
2
Tally Common
6
+5 VDC supply
12
Enable Logic Inputs (+)
4
+5 VDC Supply
10
PIN
BLK
WHT
RED
GRN
BRN
BLU
ORG
YEL
SIGNAL
1
Logic GND
2
Off Tally
3
On Tally
4
Power Supply
5
Off Switch
6
On Switch
7
Cough Switch
8
Talkback Switch
PARTS LIST
Cable: Belden 9421 or equiv.
8-pin MOD IV Housing: 14-486 (Tyco-AMP 87631-4)
12-pin MOD IV housing: 14-490 (Tyco-AMP 87922-2)
MOD IV contacts: 15-938-1 (Tyco-AMP 102128-1)
90-1875 Cable for Mic Control Panel to
an Assignable Logic Connector
TO CONSOLE DISPLAY
+
METER SIGNAL
NAMES CABLE
TIMER
CABLE
J6
J1
AUX
48 V
J2
+48V
REFLECTIVE METER
POWER CONNECTOR
+48V METER POWER
J2
1
METER GROUND
J2
2
METER DATA / TIMER CONTROL
ALPHANUMERIC
DISPLAY DATA
CONNECTOR
J6
SDATA DISPLAY 1
2
_
F1
METER 1 DATA
3
4
HOLD TIMER
SDATA CLOCK
5
6
RESET TIMER
DISPLAY 1
7
8
DISPLAY 2
SPARE MTR CTL 2
SPARE MTR CTL1
AVERAGE
DISPLAY
9
10
11
12
13
14
METER 2 DATA
PR
START TIMER
.4A
GND
STOP TIMER
1
J1
METER 1 SHIELD
2
J1
METER 1 SHIELD GND
3
J1
METER 1 HI
4
J1
5
J1
˜RESET
6
J1
METER 2 SHIELD
7
J1
METER 2 SHIELD GND
8
J1
METER 2 HI
9
J1
˜START
10
J1
˜STOP
˜HOLD
GND
CONSOLE DISPLAY INTERFACE SIGNALS
CHASSIS GND
Console Display Mainframe Chassis Connectors and Interface Signals
2-19
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
QUICK GUIDE TO FRAME AND CONSOLE DISPLAY CONNECTIONS
The Console Display has a captive umbilical cable that plugs into the rear panel of the frame (connector detail shown on
page 2-17). Rackmount the 48-volt power supply below and to the left or right of the mainframe, such that the supplied
fifteen foot power cable can plug into the rear of the supply and the rear of the mainframe without being under any tension.
A redundant supply can rackmount immediately above or below the main supply. For power supply and technical ground
wire connection details, see pages 2-6 and 2-7. For VistaMax connection details see page 2-24. For audio and logic connections see the KSU and 8-Input Expansion card Quick Guides that follow on pages 2-19 to 2-23.
STANDARD NULL
MODEM CABLE
NETWORK SWITCH
(for VistaMax System, not included)
(not included)
WINDOWS®
COMPUTER
(not included)
STANDARD CAT-5
STRAIGHT-THRU CABLE
(not included)
CAT-5e or CAT-6
CROSSOVER CABLES
(not included)
OR
OPTICAL
CABLES
(not included)
KSU CARD
VISTAMAX AUDIO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FRAME
(not included)
ESE or SMPTE MASTER CLOCK
(not included)
RMXDIGITAL FRAME, REAR PANEL, PARTIAL VIEW
48 VDC CONNECTORS
1 & 4: +48 VDC
2: SHIELD
3 & 6: 48 RETURN
5: N/C
ESE/SMPTE
CABLE
6 5 4
3 2 1
TECHNICAL
GROUND
PRIMARY
(not included)
REDUNDANT
TO CONSOLE DISPLAY
CAT-5 CABLE
TO STUDIO
MONITOR PANEL
_
+
METER SIGNAL
NAMES CABLE
FROM 48 VOLT UNIVERSAL
POWER SUPPLIES
TIMER
CABLE
AUX
48 V
90-1858-1 DC
POWER CABLES
(two included with console)
TALL CONSOLE DISPLAY
WITH CAPTURED UMBILICAL CABLE
(optional)
(optional redundant supply)
REFLECTIVE CONSOLE DISPLAY
WITH CAPTURED UMBILICAL CABLE
(included)
99-1205
48 VOLT POWER SUPPLY
FACILITY
TECHNICAL
GROUND
(one supply included)
2-20
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
QUICK GUIDE TO THE KSU CARD CONNECTIONS
The KSU card has most of the user connections for the RMXdigital. There are two types of KSU cards available: the
standard card (99-2672-1) does not have optical Facet connectors. The optional card (99-2672-2, shown below) has two
optical Facet connections in addition to the two copper Facet connections.
VistaMax High
Speed Links (x2),
(optical are optional)
Serial Test
Connector
Ethernet
Connector
Assignable Analog and Digital Input
Connections (x8, four analog and four digital)
Logic I/O Connections for Control Room,
Studio, Assignable Inputs (x3) and Cue/Talk/
External
Analog and Digital Output Connections for dedicated bus
outputs (x 18) and assignable outputs (x8, four analog and four
digital)
AUDIO INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
LOGIC I/O (CONT.)
ANAL
OG — Each routable 6-pin analog connection
ANALOG
(A, B, C, D) can be used for one stereo, or two mono, line
level signals. The nominal level for inputs and outputs is
+4 dBu, balanced, but each input is software trimmable
for use with unbalanced -10 dBv connections. The analog
connector pinout and signals were detailed on page 2-10.
B , C, D — Assignable Logic I/O connections associated with their
matching audio input (analog or digital B, C, D. Which type
input is assigned to the logic is using VMCC). Each 12-pin
connector typically connects to a peripheral device or to a mic
remote control panel. See page 2-21 for signal details
COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTIONS
DIGIT
AL — 3-pin digital inputs accept AES-3 (AES/
DIGITAL
EBU) signals with sample rates from 25 to 50 kHz. An
integral SRC (Sample Rate Converter) converts each input
to the console’s internal rate of 48 kHz, which is also the
default digital output sample rate. The PGM 1, PGM 2 and
Send outputs can each be set for 44.1 kHz outputs in teh
VMCC program. Any digital input can accept an S/PDIF
signal (see page 2-11 for details). The digital connector
pinout and signals were detailed on page 2-10.
ETHERNET — This RJ-45 connector ties the console into a
restricted-access LAN for console setup, software maintenance
and for VistaMax network communications. It should NOT
connect to the facility’s general computer LAN. Use a crossover
cable when connecting directly to a computer with a network
card, or use a straight-thru cable when connecting to a
network switch (recommended) or network hub.
TEST INTERF
A CE — A 9-pin serial I/O interface to
INTERFA
connect to the serial port on a computer using a null modem
cable. Use HyperTerminal or other comm port program to
monitor RMXdigital activity.
LOGIC I/O
CO N T R
OL R
OOM & STUDIO — Two 14-pin
RO
ROOM
connectors for separate control of control room and studio
logic. See page 2-20 for signal details.
FA CET 0, 1 — Two RJ-45 “copper” connectors (standard)
carry the VistaMax High Speed Link signals to/from a VistaMax
Hub card. Each Facet uses a CAT-5e or CAT-6 crossover cable.
The two optional optical connectors take precedence over the
matching copper connector when connected to an active
optical connection on a VistaMax Hub card.
CUE/T
ALK/EX
T — A 12-pin connector with a remote
CUE/TALK/EX
ALK/EXT
cue logic input, talkback logic control and control logic for
an external location. See page 2-22 for signal details.
2-21
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
KSU CARD CONNECTIONS (CONT.)
Control Room and Studio Logic I/O Signal Definitions
(see page 2-13 for a simplified circuit block diagram)
PIN NAME / NUMBER
ENABLE LOGIC INPUTS (+)
(pin 14)
MUTE (-) (pin 8)
DIM (-) (pin 9)
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
To enable the control inputs: Mute and Dim, tie this pin to + logic voltage (+5 to +40). When tied to an
isolated device like a talk panel, jumper to pin 7 (+5 volts) to enable the inputs. When tied to a peripheral
device, connect to the peripheral device + voltage pin.
When pulled low, mutes the speaker monitor output and triggers the Mute Relay output. May also turn on
the Warning Tally output, depending upon session file settings.
When pulled low, dims the speaker monitor output and triggers the Dim Relay output.
RELAYS COMMON (pin 10)
The Common (C) relay contact output for the Talk, Dim, and Mute Relays. It can be set for active low or high
logic: for an active low output jumper this pin to logic ground; for active high output, jumper this pin to the
+ voltage logic supply. For isolated operation, the ground and/or logic supply should be supplied by the
peripheral device. When used with a remote panel, jumper to pin 3 for active low logic or pin 6 for active
high logic. Relay outputs can sink or source up to 60 volts at 350 mA (combined current).
MUTE RELAY (pin 11)
Connects to Relays Common (pin 10) while mute is active. Output is a N.O. dry contact type that is typically
used to drive a mute indicator or to mute talk and cue speakers.
DIM RELAY (pin 12)
TALK RELAY (pin 13)
WARNING RELAY (pins 4, 5)
+5 VOLT LOGIC SUPPLY
(pins 6 and 7)
LOGIC GND (pins 1, 2, 3)
Connects to Relays Common (pin 10) while dim is active. Output is a N.O. dry contact type that is typically
used to drive a dim indicator or to control a switch to dim talk and cue speakers.
Connects to Relays Common (pin 10) while receiving a talk command. Output is a N.O. dry contact type that
is typically used to drive an indicator or to control an incoming talk speaker switch.
Isolated N.O. dry contacts for control of a warning lamp interface (like the Harris WL-2) when a mute
command is received. Up to 60 volts at 350 mA can be switched through the contacts.
Console logic voltage output source that can deliver up to 300 mA of current for isolated devices. Pins are
paralleled for convenience.
Console logic ground. Should be connected to isolated devices only.
Control Room & Studio Logic
14-Pin Logic Connector
Housing
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Pin numbering order,
wire insertion end view,
as plugged into the console
2-22
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
KSU CARD CONNECTIONS (CONT.)
Assignable Logic I/O Default Signal Definitions (also applies to the 8-Input Expansion Card Logic I/O)
(see page 2-13 for a simplified circuit block diagram)
PIN NAME / NUMBER
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
START PULSE
(pin 11, Line logic)
Equivalent to a Normally Open (N.O.) relay contact (the common contact is pin 6). The output logic type is
set in the session file for: one momentary 220 msec contact closure when the channel is turned On from
Off; a 220 msec contact closure each time the On button is pressed or; a maintained contact closure while
the channel is on. Typically connected to the Remote On logic input on a peripheral device.
ON TALLY
(pin 11, Mic Logic)
Connects to Tally Common (pin 6) while the channel is on. Output is a N.O. dry contact type that is typically
used to drive the On switch LEDs. Tally outputs can sink or source up to 60 volts at 350 mA.
STOP PULSE
(pin 5, Line logic)
Follows the logic setting for the Start Pulse. This command is initiated by the channel strip Off button.
Typically connects to a Remote Stop, Off, or Pause logic input on a peripheral device.
OFF TALLY
(pin 5, Mic logic)
Connects to Tally Common (pin 6) while the channel is off. Output is a N.O. dry contact type that is typically
used to drive switch LEDs. Tally outputs can sink or source up to 60 volts at 350 mA.
PULSE COMMON
(pin 6, Line logic)
The Common (C) relay contact for the Start and Stop Pulse contacts for line logic. For active high logic
outputs, connect this pin to the logic supply voltage on the peripheral device. For active low outputs,
connect this pin to logic ground on the peripheral device.
TALLY COMMON
(pin 6, Mic logic)
The Common (C) relay contact output for the On and Off Tallies. When used with mic control panels, this pin
is typically jumpered to pin 12 to supply +5 volts for the switch LEDs.
ENABLE LOGIC INPUTS (+)
(pin 4, Mic or Line logic)
To enable the control inputs: On, Off, Cough (Ready), Talk to C/R (Cue), tie this pin to +5 to +40 volts. When
tied to an isolated device like a mic remote panel, jumper to pin 10 (+5 volts) to enable the inputs. When
tied to a peripheral device, connect to the peripheral device + voltage pin.
ON (-)
(pin 9, Mic or Line logic)
When pulled low, turns the channel on, turning on the On Tally output and generating a Start Pulse when
Line logic is active. This is a momentary connection that is latched by the channel strip logic.
OFF (-)
(pin 3, Mic or Line logic)
When pulled low, turns the channel off, turning on the Off Tally output and generating a Stop Pulse when
Line logic is active. This is a momentary connection that is latched by the channel strip logic.
COUGH (-)
(pin 8, Mic logic)
When pulled low while the channel is on, turns off the channel On lamp and mutes the channel audio on all
assigned buses. Has no effect when the channel is off.
READY (-)
(pin 8, Line logic)
When pulled low, while the channel is on, turns the channel off without generating a stop pulse. When
pulled low while the channel is already off (and Ready lamp control is set active), controls the Off button
illumination to indicate device status. Typically, no light indicates the peripheral is not ready, a steady light
indicates the device is ready, and a flashing light indicates the device has played or is not yet cued up.
TALK TO C/R (-)
(pin 2, Mic logic)
When pulled low, routes the channel’s input audio (pre-fader/pre-switch) to the control room talkback bus.
This is a momentary connection that is only active while being held low (e.g., the Talk button is pressed).
CUE (-)
(pin 2, Line logic)
When pulled low, routes the channel’s input audio (pre-fader/pre-switch) to the cue bus. This is a toggle On/
Off connection. The session file determines whether the cue bus resets at channel on or is left active.
+5 VOLT LOGIC SUPPLY
(pins 10 and 12)
Console logic voltage output sources that can deliver up to 300 mA of current to isolated control panels. All
pins are simply paralleled for convenience.
LOGIC GND (pin 1)
Console logic ground. Should be connected to isolated control panels only.
Assignable Logic I/O
12-Pin Logic Connector
Housing
1 2
7 8
Pin numbering order,
wire insertion end view,
as plugged into the console
3 4 5 6
9 10 11 12
2-23
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
KSU CARD CONNECTIONS (CONT.)
Cue/Talk/External Logic I/O Signal Definitions
(see page 2-13 for a simplified circuit block diagram)
PIN NAME / NUMBER
RELAYS COMMON (pin 3)
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The Common (C) relay contact output for the Talk, Dim, Mute, and Timer Reset relays. It can be set for active
low or high logic: for an active low output jumper this pin to logic ground; for active high output, jumper
this pin to the + voltage logic supply. For isolated operation, the ground and/or logic supply should be
supplied by the peripheral device. When used with remote panels, jumper to pin 9 for active low logic or to
pin 1 for active high logic. Relay outputs can sink or source up to 60 volts at 350 mA (combined current).
EXT TIMER RESET (pin 4)
A single momentary connection to Relays Common (pin 3) occurs whenever a channel resets the event
timer in the Console Display. This connection typically connects to the reset logic input on a studio or
external location event timer.
EXT MUTE RELAY (pin 6)
Connects to Relays Common (pin 3) while mute is active. Output is a N.O. dry contact type that is typically
used to drive a mute indicator or to mute talk and cue speakers.
EXT DIM RELAY (pin 7)
Connects to Relays Common (pin 3) while dim is active. Output is a N.O. dry contact type that is typically
used to drive a dim indicator or to control a dim switch for talk and cue speakers.
TALK TO EXT RELAY (pin 5)
Connects to Relays Common (pin 3) while receiving a Talk to External command. Output is a N.O. dry
contact type that is typically used to drive an indicator or to switch a signal to a talk speaker.
ENABLE LOGIC INPUTS (+)
(pin 10)
To enable the two external control inputs: Talk to C/R and Cue, tie this pin to + logic voltage (+5 to +40).
When tied to isolated devices like remote control panels, jumper to pin 8 (+5 volts) to enable the inputs.
When tied to a peripheral device, connect to the peripheral device + voltage pin.
EXT CUE (-) (pin 12)
EXT TALK TO C/R (-) (pin 11)
+5 VOLT LOGIC SUPPLY
(pins 1 and 8)
LOGIC GND (pins 2 and 9)
While held low, routes the input designated as the External Cue Input onto the cue bus .
While held low, routes the input designated as the External Talk Audio input to the talk to C/R bus.
Console logic voltage output sources that can deliver up to 300 mA of current to isolated control panels. All
pins are simply paralleled for convenience.
Console logic ground. Should be connected to isolated control panels only.
Cue/Talk/Ext Logic
12-Pin Logic Connector
Housing
1 2
7 8
3 4 5 6
9 10 11 12
Pin numbering order,
wire insertion end view,
as plugged into the console
2-24
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
QUICK GUIDE TO THE 8-INPUT EXPANSION CARD CONNECTIONS
The optional 8-Input Expansion card adds eight audio inputs and eight Assignable Logic I/O connections to a DSP
Card. There can be one 8-Input Expansion card added to each DSP card in a console. Since the RMXd-4 does not have a
DSP card, an 8-Input Expansion card cannot be used in that size frame.
The eight 6-pin audio connectors are individually set as an analog or a digital input by the eight Audio Format DIP
switches next to audio input 1. Digital signals connect using a 3-pin connector plugged into the back row of pins in the
same orientation as on the KSU card. There is no connection to the front row of pins on a digital signal. Each analog input
uses a 6-pin connector with either one stereo pair or two separate mono signals on the connector. Note that the 6-pin
connectors are reversed from the analog connector orientation on the KSU card.
The eight Assignable Logic I/O connections can be bound to any audio input on this 8-Input Expansion card. See page
2-21 for the Assignable Logic I/O signal summary.
Assignable Logic I/O Connectors (x8)
Assignable Analog or
Digital Input Connections (x8)
AUDIO INPUTS 1 - 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 2 3
FOR AN ANAL
OG INPUT — Set the matching numbered DIP switch toward the board operator to
ANALOG
select analog. Connect one stereo or two mono line level signals to the input using one 6-pin AMP MOD IV
connector. Each input can be trimmed in VMCC for unbalanced -10 dBv connections. Note that these
connectors have reversed orientation from the analog connectors on the KSU Card (the left input is on the
back row of pins).
FOR A DIGIT
AL INPUT — Set the matching numbered DIP switch toward the back of the console to
DIGITAL
select digital. Use a 3-pin AMP MOD IV connector to plug an AES/EBU signal into the rear row of pins (the
front row of pins is not used). See page 2-11 on how to connect a S/PDIF signal. The digital connections use
the same orientation as the digital connectors on the KSU Card.
ASSIGNABLE LOGIC I/O
1 2
7 8
3 4 5 6
9 10 11 12
1 - 8 — A peripheral, peripheral control panel or a mic control panel can connect to each 12-pin
connector. For the default logic signals, see page 2-21. For a block diagram of the Assignable Logic
I/O interface, see page 2-13. Each Assignable Logic connection can be bound to an audio input on
this card. See chapter 4 for additional setup and application information.
2-25
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
QUICK GUIDE TO VISTAMAX CONNECTIONS
The KSU card has two Facet connections to integrate the console with a VistaMax Audio Management System. Each
connection can tie to a facet on a VistaMax Hub card. Each facet carries 64 audio channels and associated logic to a
VistaMax frame as well as 64 audio channels, with associated logic, from the VistaMax frame to the console. By using two
CAT-5e or CAT-6 cables, 128 bidirectional signals can be connected simultaneously up to 100 meters away. To go beyond
this distance, the optional optical connections must be used. These connections allow a console to connect to a VistaMax
Hub card that is up to 2 km away from the console.
The RJ-45 Ethernet connector ties the console into a LAN for communications and control within a VistaMax system.
This is done through a network switch which also has all of the VistaMax frames, control panels, additional RMXdigital
consoles, BMXdigital consoles, and setup computers in the network connected to it. Each device connected to the network
switch has a unique TCP/IP address assigned during installation. Each RMXdigital console has the address: 192.168.100.22
assigned at the factory. This address MUST be changed prior to connecting the console to a VistaMax LAN. See chapter 4,
RMXdigital Server for details on changing this address. Refer to the VistaMax operating manual (75-52) for additional
configuration details.
VISTAMAX AUDIO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FRAME
(rear view)
CTRL COM
NORMAL
/ DATA
NORMAL
/ DATA
5
4
3
1
1
1
2
+_
+5
+_
+_
+5
4
5
CTRL COM
CTRL COM
CTRL COM
CTRL COM
CTRL COM
NORMAL
/ DATA
NORMAL
/ DATA
NORMAL
/ DATA
NORMAL
/ DATA
NORMAL
/ DATA
NORMAL
/ DATA
NORMAL
/ DATA
NORMAL
/ DATA
VALID
EXTERNAL
REFERENCE
INPUT
VALID
EXTERNAL
REFERENCE
INPUT
VALID
EXTERNAL
REFERENCE
INPUT
VALID
EXTERNAL
REFERENCE
INPUT
SYSTEM
MASTER
15
15
14
14
13
8
7
6
1
EXT. AES
REFERENCE
INPUT
11
10
9
8
7
6
1
A B C
2
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
CTRL COM
3
4
5
VALID
EXT.
REF.
+ 3
_ 2
1
EXT. AES
REFERENCE
INPUT
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
INACTIVE
INACTIVE
CTRL COM
CTRL COM
CTRL COM
NORMAL
/ DATA
NORMAL
/ DATA
NORMAL
/ DATA
TEST
INTERFACE
TEST
INTERFACE
VALID
EXTERNAL
REFERENCE
INPUT
WINDOWS®
COMPUTER
A B C
A B C
A B C
INACTIVE
NORMAL
/ DATA
SYSTEM
MASTER
(LED ON = ACTIVE)
13
12
12
9
+ 3
_ 2
13
13
12
11
INACTIVE
OPTICAL FACETS
16
15
14
10
VALID
EXT.
REF.
16
16
15
14
3
1
+5
NORMAL
/ DATA
A B C
6
2
INACTIVE
A B C
CONTROLLER
CARD RESET
4
INACTIVE
A B C
7
5
INACTIVE
A B C
8
3
INACTIVE
CTRL COM
9
1
INACTIVE
CTRL COM
11
4
5
4
INACTIVE
5
CONTROLLER
CARD RESET
12
10
2
9
8
INACTIVE
16
+_
5
4
5
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
13
12
INACTIVE
CTRL COM
CTRL COM
3
4
17
16
SYSTEM RESET
32
16
15
29
28
14
13
25
24
12
21
20
17
16
13
12
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
9
8
1
1
21
20
11
LOGIC OUTPUTS
6
9
8
2
1
ANALOG OUTPUTS
7
3
2
1
2
ANALOG OUTPUTS
8
4
3
2
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
13
12
9
5
4
3
+_
12
11
10
6
5
4
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
13
12
13
17
16
6
5
1
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
21
20
17
16
6
2
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
25
24
21
20
15
7
SYSTEM
MASTER
ANALOG OUTPUTS
25
24
16
14
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
29
28
LOGIC OUTPUTS
32
29
28
LOGIC OUTPUTS
32
8
3
A B C
A B C
A B C
A B C
9
4
+_
CTRL COM
11
10
5
INACTIVE
VALID
EXTERNAL
REFERENCE
INPUT
7
+_
NORMAL
/ DATA
8
+_
CTRL COM
NORMAL
/ DATA
9
+_
CTRL COM
INACTIVE
1
12
11
10
6
5
INACTIVE
7
10
9
8
7
6
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
NETWORK
INTERFACE
NETWORK
INTERFACE
5
9
8
4
VALID
EXT.
REF.
5
4
3
+ 3
_ 2
1
1
+_
+_
INACTIVE
8
+5
+_
+_
+_
INACTIVE
9
SYSTEM RESET
EXT. AES
REFERENCE
INPUT
2
1
+_
+_
+5
3
4
11
10
+_
+5
2
7
13
+_
1
4
8
15
14
25
24
+_
3
1
12
12
9
STANDARD NULL
MODEM CABLE
A B C
16
0
29
28
+_
5
5
4
1
12
11
10
2
0
DIGITAL INPUTS
9
8
5
4
13
COPPER
FACETS
A B C
32
LOGIC INPUTS
6
9
8
1
15
14
13
DIGITAL I/O CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
HUB
LOGIC I/O
A B C
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ANALOG INPUTS
7
15
14
13
A B C
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ANALOG INPUTS
8
15
14
DIGITAL INPUTS
9
15
13
DIGITAL INPUTS
11
10
ANALOG I/O ANALOG I/O
COPPER
FACETS
A B C
16
14
DIGITAL INPUTS
13
12
HUB
DIGITAL I/O
A B C
16
+_
12
17
16
0
DIGITAL I/O
A B C
16
+_
13
DIGITAL I/O
A B C
16
DIGITAL INPUTS
21
20
13
12
COPPER
FACETS
ANALOG INPUTS
21
20
15
14
DIGITAL INPUTS
25
24
LOGIC INPUTS
29
28
25
24
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
DIGITAL I/O
HUB
A B C
A B C
16
LOGIC INPUTS
29
28
17
16
DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O
A B C
32
+_
LOGIC I/O
A B C
+_
LOGIC I/O
32
All network cables are
CAT-5, straight-thru type
PRE99-1365 PRE99-1365 PRE99-1362 PRE99-1361 PRE99-1363-1 PRE99-1362 PRE99-1362 PRE99-1362 PRE99-1362 PRE99-1363-2 PRE99-1361 PRE99-1361 PRE99-1365 PRE99-1363-1 PRE99-1362 PRE99-1360 PRE99-1360
From additional:
RMXDigital KSU cards;
BMXDigital Session Modules;
setup computers;
VistaMax frames;
VistaMax control panels
CAT-5e or CAT-6
Crossover type cables
NETWORK SWITCH
KSU CARD
2-26
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
MIC REMOTE CONTROL CONNECTION EXAMPLE
This example shows a mic remote control panel connected to an Assignable Logic I/O connector, using the
default logic settings. Information on binding the logic to the mic audio input and the channel strip session
settings for microphones are covered in chapter 4, RMXdigital Server and in Appendix A, VMCC.
ASSIGNABLE LOGIC I/O CONNECTOR SIGNAL TABLE
PIN # SIGNAL
1 2
7 8
LOGIC GR
OUND
GROUND
TALK INPUT (-)
OFF INPUT (-)
ENABLE LLOGIC
OGIC INPUT
S (+)
INPUTS
OFF TALL
Y
ALLY
TALL
YC
OMMON
ALLY
COMMON
+5 V OL
T LLOGIC
OGIC SUPPL
Y
OLT
SUPPLY
COUGH INPUT (-)
ON INPUT (-)
+5 V OL
T LLOGIC
OGIC SUPPL
Y
OLT
SUPPLY
Y
ON TALL
ALLY
+5 V OL
T LLOGIC
OGIC SUPPL
Y
OLT
SUPPLY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
3 4 5 6
9 10 11 12
(wire insertion end view)
FUNCTION
Notes:
+VDC is between +5 and +40 VDC.
Outputs can switch voltages up to +60 VDC at 350 mA total
B old indicates connections used in this example.
99-1197 or 99-1198
MIC CONTROL PANEL
ASSIGNABLE
LOGIC CONNECTOR
SIGNAL
PIN
Logic Ground
1
Off Tally
5
On Tally
11
+5 VDC Supply
7
Off Switch (-)
3
On Switch (-)
9
Cough Switch (-)
8
Talk Switch (-)
2
Tally Common
6
+5 VDC supply
12
Enable Logic Inputs (+)
4
+5 VDC Supply
10
Logic ground
Remote Talkback switch input (active low)
Remote Off switch input (active low)
Jumper to +VDC to enable switch inputs
Off tally output, N.O. contact
Tally relays common connection, C contact
5 volt source for Cough and Talkback Tallies
Remote Cough switch input (active low)
Remote On switch input (active low)
5 volt source to enable switches
On tally output, N.O. contact
5 volt source for switch tallies
PIN
BLK
WHT
RED
GRN
BRN
BLU
ORG
YEL
SIGNAL
1
Logic GND
2
Off Tally
3
On Tally
4
Power Supply
5
Off Switch
6
On Switch
7
Cough Switch
8
Talkback Switch
PARTS LIST
Cable: Belden 9421 or equiv.
8-pin MOD IV Housing: 14-486 (Tyco-AMP 87631-4)
12-pin MOD IV housing: 14-490 (Tyco-AMP 87922-2)
MOD IV contacts: 15-938-1 (Tyco-AMP 102128-1)
Mic (with preamp)
connected to
analog Input D
KSU CARD
Mic control Panel
(99-1198) connected to
Assignable Logic I/O D
TALK
BACK
COUGH
ON
OFF
EXAMPLE OF A MIC & CONTROL PANEL USING
INPUT D ON THE KSU CARD
2-27
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
BASIC PERIPHERAL DEVICE LOGIC CONNECTION EXAMPLE
This example shows a peripheral device (with basic logic functions like the CD player shown below) connected
to an Assignable Logic I/O connector using the default logic settings. Information on binding the logic with the
peripheral’s audio inputs and the channel strip session file settings for peripherals are covered in chapter 4,
RMXdigital Server and in Appendix A, VMCC.
ASSIGNABLE LOGIC I/O CONNECTOR SIGNAL TABLE
1 2
7 8
3 4 5 6
9 10 11 12
(wire insertion end view)
PIN # SIGNAL
FUNCTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Logic ground
Remote Cue switch input (active low)
Remote Off switch input (active low)
Jumper to +VDC to enable switch inputs
Stop command output, N.O. contact
Start/Stop Pulse common, C contact
5 volt source
Remote Ready switch input (active low)
Remote On switch input (active low)
5 volt source to enable switches
Start command output, N.O. contact
5 volt source for switch tallies
Notes:
LOGIC GROUND
CUE INPUT (-)
OFF INPUT (-)
ENABLE LLOGIC
OGIC INPUT
S (+)
INPUTS
ST
OP PULSE
STOP
PULSE C
OMMON
COMMON
+5 VOLT LOGIC SUPPLY
READ
Y INPUT (-)
READY
ON INPUT (-)
+5 VOLT LOGIC SUPPLY
ST
AR
T PULSE
STAR
ART
+5 VOLT LOGIC SUPPLY
+VDC is between +5 and +40 VDC.
Outputs can switch voltages up to +60 VDC at 350 mA total
B old indicates connections used in this example.
ASSIGNABLE
LOGIC CONNECTOR
SIGNAL
PIN
Pulse Common
6
Enable Logic Inputs (+)
4
Stop Pulse
5
Start Pulse
11
Ready (-)
DENON DN-SERIES
CD PLAYER LOGIC
BRN
BLK
GRN
RED
WHT
8
CR1
CR2
PARTS LIST
Cable: 19-119 (Belden 8445 or equiv.)
Diodes: 11-7 (1N4001 or equiv.)
25-pin DSub: 15-854 (DB-25P)
12-pin MOD IV housing: 14-490 (Tyco-AMP 87922-2)
MOD IV contacts: 15-938-1 (Tyco-AMP 102128-1)
2-28
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision c • 10/07
I
O
N
PIN
SIGNAL
23
Switch Common
22
Tally Common
3
Pause N.O.
2
Play N.O.
16
Standby/Cue Tally
15
Pause Tally
2 Installation
COMPLEX LOGIC CONNECTION EXAMPLE
This example shows a peripheral device with complex logic functions (a digital delivery system) connected to
an Assignable Logic I/O connector, using default logic settings. For most peripheral devices, the logic ground and
+5 volt supply connections are not used, but in this example all of the digital delivery system connections are also
isolated. Information on binding the logic to the peripheral’s audio inputs and the channel strip session file
settings for peripherals are covered in chapter 4, RMXdigital Server and in Appendix A, VMCC.
ASSIGNABLE INPUT LOGIC CONNECTOR SIGNAL TABLE
PIN # SIGNAL
1 2
7 8
3 4 5 6
9 10 11 12
(wire insertion end view)
FUNCTION
LOGIC GR
OUND
GROUND
CUE INPUT (-)
OFF INPUT (-)
ENABLE LLOGIC
OGIC INPUT
S (+)
INPUTS
ST
OP PULSE
STOP
PULSE C
OMMON
COMMON
+5 VOLT LOGIC SUPPLY
READ
Y INPUT (-)
READY
ON INPUT (-)
OGIC SUPPL
Y
+5 V OL
T LLOGIC
SUPPLY
OLT
ST
AR
T PULSE
STAR
ART
+5 V OL
T LLOGIC
OGIC SUPPL
Y
OLT
SUPPLY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Notes:
Logic ground
Remote Cue switch input (active low)
Remote Off switch input (active low)
Jumper to +VDC to enable switch inputs
Stop command output, N.O. contact
Start/Stop Pulse common, C contact
5 volt source
Remote Ready switch input (active low)
Remote On switch input (active low)
5 volt source to enable switches
Start command output, N.O. contact
5 volt source for switch tallies
+VDC is between +5 and +40 VDC.
Outputs can switch voltages up to +60 VDC at 350 mA total
B old indicates connections used in this example.
ASSIGNABLE
LOGIC CONNECTOR
SIGNAL
PIN
Start Pulse
11
Stop Pulse
5
On (-)
ENCO DADPRO
INTERFACE LOGIC
PIN
BLK
WHT
BRN
9
CR1
RED
SIGNAL
8
Input 0 (+)
7
Input 1 (+)
19
Relay 0 N.O.
36
Relay 1 N.O.
Ready (-)
8
Logic GND
1
16
Relay 2 N.O.
Enable Logic Inputs (+)
4
27
Input 0 (-)
+5 VDC
10
26
Input 1 (-)
Pulse Common
6
37
Relay 0 common
+5 VDC
12
17
Relay 1 Common
34
Relay 2 Common
GRN
CR2
PARTS LIST
Cable: 19-119 (Belden 8445 or equiv.)
Diodes: 11-7 (1N4001 or equiv.)
37-pin DSub: 15-885 (DC 110963-4)
DSub crimp pins: 15-884 (DB-37P)
12-pin MOD IV housing: 14-490 (Tyco-AMP 87922-2)
MOD IV contacts: 15-938-1 (Tyco-AMP 102128-1)
2-29
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
2 Installation
Buttoncap Lenses
All buttoncaps on the RMXdigital are shipped
from the factory with laser-etched lenses with standard labeling (as shown on pages 3-2 and 3-4).
Laser etching ensures each buttoncap’s labeling
withstands millions of button pushes.
Selected buttoncaps feature removable lenses for
field installation of custom printed inserts. Two
sizes of clear lenses and inserts are available: large,
for the Off buttons on the Dual Fader panels and
the two talk buttons on the Monitor Control panel;
and small, for the Talkback buttons on the Dual
Fader panels and for the twenty-one selector buttons on the Monitor Control panel.
Clear lenses for both size buttoncaps are included in the 76-1400 install kit.They hold printed
inserts in place on the removable lens buttoncaps.
Additional clear lenses of both sizes are available
in the 76-1403 kit for the Monitor Control panel
INSERT TEMPLATE, FOR USE ON
BUTTONS WITH REMOVABLE LENS
(twenty-one small and two large lenses) and the
76-1404 kit for the Universal Dual Fader Input
structions, then click delete). Only the lens text
panel (two large and two small lenses).
A Microsoft® Word template file (71-1961,
should remain on the page. Place the 80-1961
shown in the right column) is available on the CD-
sheet into the printer so it is properly oriented
ROM or on the Harris FTP site (see page 5-1 for
and print the page.
access info). It is used with the 80-1961 clear in-
If the printed test sheet does not line up with
sert sheet to create custom lens labels. The 80-
the blank 80-1961 sheet, then try printing using
1961 sheet, with diecut inserts for both small and
manual feed to adjust the page or adjust the tem-
large lenses, can be laser or inkjet printed. One
plate button outlines and text slightly on the page
80-1961 sheet is included in the 76-1400 kit.
until they are properly aligned—which, unfortunately, is easier said than done in Word.
To use the 71-1961 template, open it up in Word
and replace the default lens text for the number of
LENS REMOVAL
buttons that require new labels. Print the template
onto a blank sheet of paper. Note its orientation
Catch a thumbnail under the top edge of the
as it comes out of the printer. Compare the printed
lens and pull up to remove it. Place the printed
sheet to the blank 80-1961 sheet by aligning both
clear insert into the buttoncap, and then snap a
sheets over a light. If the lens cutouts match the
clear lens onto the buttoncap.
Be sure to retain the factory-etched lenses for
printed sheet lens outlines, then delete the out-
possible future reuse.
lines and instructions on the template (click on
the title block, then click delete, click in the in2-30
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
Console Operation
T
3
MONITOR CONTROL PANEL
his chapter covers how to use the RMX-
This standard panel is installed near the right
side of the frame. The panel is divided into three
digital console controls.
columns:
• Session / Timer / Aux Meter controls
Console Overview
• Control Room Monitor controls
• Studio Monitor controls
RMXdigital consoles consist of: a mainframe;
A Quick Guide to using the Monitor Control
one Monitor Control panel; multiple Universal
panel is on pages 3-4 to 3-7.
Dual Fader panels; a Console Display (with two
stereo bargraph meters, clock, and timer); and a
CONSOLE DISPLAY
rack-mount power supply.
Two displays are available for the RMXdigital:
the original direct-view display and a low-profile
UNIVERSAL DUAL FADER PANELS
Reflective Console Display. Each is set onto the
Input audio is selected and level controlled us-
countertop behind the control panels. Each type
ing the “channel strip” controls on Universal Dual
has two signal level meters (which show the Pro-
Fader panels. The initial input source for each
gram 1 bus and a selectable auxiliary source), a
channel strip is set by loading a session file—a
time of day clock, and an event timer. A Quick
console setup file previously created by engineer-
Guide to the Console Displays is on page 3-8.
ing or operations.
Multiple session files can be saved to the con-
POWER SUPPLY
sole to set-up that console for specific dayparts or
The RMXdigital power supply is designed spe-
for specific applications (e.g., a morning zoo show
cifically for 24/7 operation and should not be pow-
setup versus a single board operator setup, or voice
ered down since doing so will cause complete sig-
tracking versus commercial production). Session
nal interruption.
files are selected and “taken” using the session se-
A recessed power switch on the front panel of
lection controls on the Monitor Control panel.
the supply is used to turn off the power supply. If
Each dual fader panel has two separate chan-
it is turned off, wait at least fifteen seconds before
nel strips for controlling two audio signals inde-
turning the supply back on.
pendently. The audio signals may be connected
to the RMXdigital or, when the console is net-
NOTE: Mainframe backup batteries hold the
worked in a VistaMax system, may come from
channel settings for a limited amount of time dur-
other RMXdigital consoles or VistaMax or En-
ing momentary power outages. However, it will still
voy cardframes.
take about 90 seconds for the console to “boot up”
A Quick Guide to using Universal Dual Fader
and become available after the power supply is
panels is on pages 3-2 and 3-3.
turned on.
3-1
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T I O N
Revision C • 10/07
3
Operation
UNIVERSAL DUAL FADER PANEL QUICK GUIDE
Each panel has two identical “channel strips” for independent control of two audio sources. The initial audio
source for each channel strip is set by taking a session file. Sources may then be manually changed on the panel
using the Source Selector and Take button, or by taking a different session file.
FADER SECTION CONTROLS
Input N
ame D
ispla
y — The ten-character displays show each
Name
Displa
isplay
channel’s input source. When the Source Selector is actively being used,
the yellow Next LED lights to indicate the display is now showing an
alternate source name.
elec
S o u rrcc e S
electt or — A rotary encoder used to scroll alphaSelec
numerically through a list of alternate input sources. The source names
shown can be limited by the session file, thus there might only be the
assigned source (plus Silence) shown when this control is used.
TAKE — Selects the alternate input source when TAKE is pressed while
the Next LED is lit and the channel is Off. If TAKE is pressed while the
channel is On and the Next LED is lit, the channel “pends” (the On
button flashes) to indicate the new source will be taken as soon as the
channel is turned off.
FCN — Function button. Press and hold to access special channel strip
features. It is not active at this time.
Fader — 100mm channel level control with dB indications to show
relative attenuation. For unity gain, set the fader to the red line (-12
dB). This makes a nominal +4 dBu analog input signal appear as a
-20 dBFS (0 VU) signal on the meters.
TALKB
A CK — Active (lit) only when a channel strip is set as a Telco
ALKBA
channel during console setup. While pressed, the control room talk mics,
pre-switch and pre-fader, are sent to that Telco channel’s Mix-Minus
output. Up to six faders can be set as Telco channels.
FADER
SECTION
CUE — When lit, routes pre-fader, pre-switch audio to the cue output
without affecting the on-air signal. On CR mic channels, the cue button
is momentary and the input only goes to the Cue meter display. On all
other inputs it latches (toggle cue on and off) and the input goes to both
the Cue speaker and the Cue meter display.
ON — Press to turn the channel on. The button lights, routing the
audio to the selected buses. Logic control commands may also be
initiated, depending upon session file logic settings for the source.
OFF — Press to turn the channel off. This removes the audio from all
selected buses except those set for pre-switch operation. Logic control
commands may also be initiated, depending upon session file logic
settings for the source. The button may not light up when pressed since
some inputs may be set to indicate peripheral device status.
3-2
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
3
UNIVERSAL DUAL FADER PANEL (CONT.)
SEND
This section has the send bus controls.
ON/OFF — When lit, routes the input audio to the send bus through
the send volume control and the Pre Fader and Pre Switch controls.
When unlit, no audio on this channel goes to the send bus.
on
ol — Sets the level of the audio going to the
R otar
y V olume C
ontt rrol
otary
Con
send bus.
SEND
PRE FFADER
ADER — When lit, any audio going to the send bus is not
affected by the channel fader. When unlit, the audio level to the send
bus is also affected by the channel fader.
PRE SWIT
CH — When lit, the audio going to the send bus is not
SWITCH
affected by the channel On/Off buttons. When unlit, the audio to the
send bus follows the channel on/off status.
PROGRAM
BUS
PROGRAM BUSES
This section has the Program and Offline bus assignment buttons.
PR
OGR
AM 1, 2, 3, 4 — When lit, routes the channel audio, post
ROGR
OGRAM
fader and post switch, to any combination of the four Program buses.
When unlit, the channel audio does not go to that bus.
MODE /
PAN / BAL
OFFLINE — When lit, routes the channel audio to the Offline bus. The
Offline feed is always pre-switch and is typically pre-fader as well (it
can be set to be post-fader through a session file setting). This bus is
used to create offline mixes for the Telco return feeds.
AU T
O F/B— The Automatic Foldback button is only active on Telco
TO
channels. When lit, it automatically toggles the caller’s return feed
between Offline (when the Telco channel is Off) and an active Program
bus (when the Telco channel is On). Page 3-10 has operational details.
MODE / PAN / BAL
This section has the channel mode and pan/balance controls.
L and R — Sets the audio mode. For stereo, both buttons are unlit.
With L (left) lit, the left input feeds both left and right bus outputs. With
R (right) lit, the right input feeds both left and right bus outputs. With
both L and R lit, the inputs are summed to mono and then fed to both
left and right bus outputs.
PAN/B
AL — When lit, the pan/balance control is active. When unlit,
AN/BAL
the pan/balance control position does not affect the audio.
R otar
yP
an/B
alanc
eC
on
ol — When PAN/BAL is lit, controls
otary
Pan/B
an/Balanc
alance
Con
ontt rrol
how the audio input is placed in aural space. On a stereo signal it is a
balance control. On a mono signal (L, R, or both lit) it is a pan control.
3-3
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
Operation
3
Operation
MONITOR CONTROL PANEL QUICK GUIDE
This card is divided into three columns by function: the left column has the auxillary meter source selectors,
the session file controls and timer control buttons; the center column has the control room monitoring controls
(monitor source selectors and level controls for the control room speakers and operator headphones); the right
column has the studio monitoring controls (monitor source selectors and level controls for studio speakers). Each
column’s functions are separately detailed over the next three pages. A card overview follows.
AUX METER, CONTROL ROOM & STUDIO
MONITOR SOURCE SELECTOR BUTTONS
LEVEL CONTROLS FOR CUE, TALKBACK
AND STUDIO MONITOR
DISPLAYS FOR SESSION NAME AND
MONITOR SOURCES, SESSION SELECTION
CONTROLS AND ADDITIONAL MONITOR
SOURCE SELECTORS FOR THE CONTROL
ROOM AND STUDIO
CONTROL ROOM MODE AND TIMER CONTROL
BUTTONS, CONTROL ROOM FADER CONTROL,
TALKBACK CONTROL
3-4
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
3
Operation
MONITOR CONTROL PANEL QUICK GUIDE,
LEFT COLUMN CONTROLS
AUX METER
The buttons in this section have removable lenses for custom labels. The signal assigned to each
button is set during console configuration. As shipped from the factory, the assigned signals are:
EX
T — When lit, assigns an External input (like Real Air) to the Aux meter.
EXT
SEND — When lit, assigns the Send bus to the Aux meter.
TEL REC — When lit, assigns the Telco Record output to the Aux meter.
PGM 1-4 — When lit, assigns one of the four Program buses to the Aux meter.
SESSION CONTROLS
These controls allow the operator to load and save a session file.
S ession N
ame D
ispla
y — The top line (Current) shows the name of the currently loaded
Name
Displa
isplay
session. The bottom line (Next) shows the name of another session, as selected using the Session
Selector. The Next session is made the Current session by pressing the Take button.
S ession S
elec
Selec
electt or — A rotary encoder to alphanumerically list the names of previously saved
session files, which appear in the bottom line of the Session Name Display.
TAKE — Press to make the Next session active. The Current and Next names will be the same
until the Session Selector is rotated.
SA
VE — Press to save the Universal Dual Fader panels’ button settings, input source names and
SAVE
other information as a new session saved locally in the console. The new session name is the current
session name plus a numerical suffix. Note: Save always creates a new session. Operators cannot
overwrite or damage any existing session.
MONITOR MODE
L & R — With both buttons unlit, the CR monitor and CR headphone outputs are stereo. With only
L (left) lit, the left bus source feeds both the left and right outputs. With only R (right) lit, the right
bus source feeds both outputs. With both lit, the left and right outputs are a sum of the bus source.
AU T
O CUE — When lit, allows cue to interrupt the operator headphone output following the
TO
routing method set during console configuration. When unlit, cue does not go to the operator
headphone output.
TIMER CONTROL
This section has the controls for the event timer in the Console Display.
AU T
O RESET — When lit, allows the timer to reset when a channel—with its timer reset function
TO
enabled by the session file, is turned on. The timer resets to 00:00.0 and starts counting upward.
When unlit, the timer ignores channel timer reset commands.
RESET — Resets the timer to 00:00.0. The timer then counts up from 00:00.0.
HOLD — When pressed and held, stops the timer’s display to show the elapsed time (the timer itself
continues to run). Releasing HOLD returns the timer display to the current run time.
ST
AR
T — Starts the timer from the displayed time.
TA
RT
ST
OP — Stops the timer with the elapsed time displayed. Press START to continue counting up
TOP
from the displayed time. Press RESET and STOP together to reset the timer to 00:00.0.
3-5
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
3
Operation
MONITOR CONTROL PANEL QUICK GUIDE,
CENTER COLUMN CONTROLS
CONTROL ROOM
All CR outputs use the same monitor source. The selected source is usually indicated by a lit
button but, if Auto Mic Switching is enabled (to switch between the Real Air source (typically EXT)
and a Synthetic Air source while a CR mic channel is On), then the Real Air button (typically EXT)
flashes to indicate Synthetic Air is the monitor source. Alternate monitor sources can be selected
using the CR Monitor Source Selector and Take button. Its name is shown in the Name Display,
which turns off all selector buttons.
The buttons in this section have removable lenses for custom labels that identify the source assigned
during console setup. Here are the assigned signals as shipped from the factor:
EX
T — When lit, typically assigns the Real Air audio to the Control Room monitor outputs.
EXT
SEND — When lit, assigns the Send bus to the Control Room monitor outputs.
TEL REC — When lit, assigns the Telco record output to the Control Room monitor outputs.
PGM 1-4 — When lit, assigns the selected Program bus to the Control Room monitor outputs.
LEVEL CONTROLS
Cue — Adjusts the output level of the built-in cue speaker and dedicated CUE output.
Talk
back — Adjusts the output level of the dedicated Talk to Control Room (TLK CR) output
alkback
and the talkback level into the Cue speaker (when Talk to Cue is set during console setup).
CONTROL ROOM MONITOR SOURCE
CR M
onit
or S
our
ame D
ispla
y — Shows the selected monitor source name (selected
Monit
onitor
Sour
ourcce N
Name
Displa
isplay
by the source selector) while the Next LED is off. When the Next LED is lit, it shows an alternate
source name that is being selected using the Source Selector. The alternate source is selected by
pressing TAKE. There is no display if a source is selected using the seven monitor source buttons.
S our
elec
ourcce S
Selec
electtor — A rotary encoder to alphanumerically list all of the alternate monitor
sources. Turning the selector turns on the Next LED. “No List” is displayed if no alternate sources
were assigned during console setup.
TAKE — Press to select the alternate monitor source while the Next LED is lit. Has no effect if
pressed while the Next LED is off.
Option LED — This LED is not used at this time.
FADERS
MONIT
OR — 100mm fader for adjusting the volume of the Control Room monitor speakers.
MONITOR
It affects the level of the Control Room MON output.
HEADPHONE — 100mm fader for adjusting the volume of the operator’s headphones. It
affects the level of the Control Room OP H/P output.
.
3-6
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
3
Operation
MONITOR CONTROL PANEL QUICK GUIDE,
RIGHT COLUMN CONTROLS
STUDIO
All Studio outputs use the same monitor source. The selected source is usually indicated by a lit
button but, if Auto Mic Switching is enabled (to switch between the Real Air source (typically EXT)
and a Synthetic Air source while a Studio mic is active), then the Real Air button (typically EXT)
flashes to indicate the Synthetic Air is the source. Alternate monitor sources are selected using the
Studio Monitor Source Selector and Take button. Its name is then shown in the Studio Monitor
Name Display, which turns off all selector button lights.
Buttons in this section have removable lenses for custom labels (the sources associated with each
button are set during console setup). The assigned signals, as shipped from the factory, are:
EX
T — When lit, typically assigns the Real Air audio to the Studio monitor outputs.
EXT
SEND — When lit, assigns the Send bus to the Studio monitor outputs.
TEL MON — When lit, assigns the Telco channels to the Studio monitor outputs.
PGM 1-4 — When lit, assigns the selected Program bus to the Studio monitor outputs.
LEVEL CONTROLS
M onit
or — Adjusts the output level of the stereo Studio Monitor (MON) output.
onitor
Talk
back — Adjusts the output level of the dedicated Talk to Studio (TLK STU) output.
alkback
STUDIO MONITOR SOURCE
S tudio M
onit
or S
our
ame D
ispla
y — Shows the selected monitor source name
Monit
onitor
Sour
ourcce N
Name
Displa
isplay
(selected by the source selector) while the Next LED is off. When the Next LED is lit, it shows an
alternate source name that is being selected using the Source Selector. The alternate source is
selected by pressing TAKE. The display is turned off when a source is selected using the seven
monitor source buttons.
S our
elec
Selec
electt or — A rotary encoder to alphanumerically show all of the alternate monitor
ourcce S
sources. Turning the selector turns on the Next LED. “No List” is displayed if no alternate sources
were assigned during console setup.
TAKE — Press to select the alternate monitor source while the Next LED is lit. Has no effect if
pressed while the Next LED is off.
Option LED — This LED is not used at this time.
TALKBACK CONTROL
These buttons route talkback audio from the talk channels to External or Studio 1 if the talk
channels have a CR mic as their source. If the talk channels are On, they are unassigned from all
buses while either talk button is pressed. Both buttons have removable lenses for custom labeling.
TALK T O EX
TERNAL — While pressed, routes the control room talk mic(s), pre-switch and
EXTERNAL
pre-fader, to the TLK TO EXT output.
TALK T O STUDIO 1 — While pressed, routes the control room talk mic(s), pre-switch and
pre-fader, to the TLK TO STU 1 outputs.
3-7
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
3
Operation
CONSOLE DISPLAY QUICK GUIDE
There are two displays available: a low-profile reflective display (standard) or the original direct-view display
on a stand (optional). Each has the same display elements: two bargraph meters, a clock and an event timer.
Auxiliary Meter
Main Meter
Time-of-Day Clock
Event Timer
RMXdigital’s Low-Profile Reflective Display
CLOCK
A detailed bargraph meter is shown below. Each
The clock displays time in hours: minutes: sec-
bar segment, from 0 to -30, represents a 1 dB level
onds in either 12- or 24-hour time. See page 2-4
change between bars. From -30 to -57, each bar
for information on setting the clock.
represents a 3 dB difference in level. Bars are green
from -57 to -20, which is equivalent to a 0 VU
EVENT TIMER
setting on a mechanical meter.With a properly set
The event timer displays time in minutes: sec-
up console this level (-20) results in a +4 dBu
onds: tenths of seconds. Page 3-5 shows the timer
analog output.
controls on the Monitor Control panel.
From -20 to -3 the LEDs are yellow. Signal levels should always peak in this area. The 0, -1, and
BARGRAPH METERS
The left meter provides level display for the Pro-
-2 bars are red to indicate the signal is danger-
gram 1 bus. The right meter (Aux meter) shows a
ously close to clipping. To prevent digital distor-
selected meter source set by the Aux Meter but-
tion on the outputs, the red bars should rarely, if
tons on the Monitor Controller (see page 3-5)—
ever, light up—especially the 0 bar since this indi-
except when cue is active, then the meter displays
cates the signal is at, or attempting to go beyond,
the cue bus levels. An alphanumeric display be-
Full Scale Digital (the digital clipping point).
The meters can be set to display average only (a
low each meter identifies the selected source by
solid moving bargraph indicates the average sig-
name (e.g., CUE, PGM 1, SEND, EXT, etc.).
Left Channel Level
Separate Blue Peak
Indicators for Left
and Right Channels
dB below FSD*
Right Channel Level
Signal name
RMXdigital Bargraph Meter
* FSD = Full Scale Digital, or 0 on the meters—the maximum console output level.
To compare to a VU meter: 0 VU is equivalent to the bargraph -20 dBFS setting.
3-8
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
3
Operation
nal level) or average and peak (a solid bargraph
fic feed, a processed mic, a digital delivery system
represents the average level with a single bar, typi-
output, an ISDN output—any audio signal needed
cally 6 to 10 dB higher than the average bargraph,
in the facility that is plugged into a RMXdigital
representing the peak level).
console, a BMXdigital console or a VistaMax rack
The two blue peak indicators may light up in
card.
either mode to indicate the signal is too hot. The
Once a source is connected, it can then be made
level at which the blue peak indicators turn on (0,
available to be selected for any number of desti-
-2, -4, or -6 dBFS), and the meter display mode
nations. A destination is an output on a VistaMax
(peak hold, where the highest peak bar stays lit
rack card, a channel on an RMXdigital console or
for about 3 seconds, or non-peak hold, where the
a KSU card routed output.
Each channel strip in an RMXdigital console is
peak more accurately follows the signal), is set
separately for each meter during installation.
a destination and, as such, can be allowed complete access to every source in the entire VistaMax
RMXdigital Applications
system or, to simplify source selection, to a limited subset of sources deemed most valuable to
The RMXdigital is a very flexible on-air, pro-
that channel. This can mean the channel is lim-
duction, newsroom, or voicing studio console that
ited to only one source, as would typically be the
may be installed as a stand-alone console or as an
case with a mic input channel. Just how large a
integral part of a VistaMax audio management
selection list is shown when the source selector is
system. Because of its flexibility and its compact
rotated is set by the session file.
design, some features require knowledge beyond
Thus, accessing networked VistaMax signals is
the typical console operation of select a bus, run
done in the same manner as accessing any locally
the fader up and turn the channel on. Here’s an
connected input source: use the source selector
overview of some of these operator features.
rotary knob to select a new source—which is
shown in the 10-character display, and while the
VISTAMAX INTEGRATION
Next LED is lit, press Take to select that source as
When the RMXdigital console is tied into a Vis-
the new input for the channel.
taMax audio management system, an almost un-
Since each channel shares a single display for
limited number of audio and audio-with-logic sig-
the current source name and the next source name,
nals become available to the console. These sig-
as soon as the source selector is turned, a Next
nals can originate locally (by being connected di-
LED turns on to indicate the display is now show-
rectly to a console input) or they can be networked
ing other available source names in alphanumeric
signals that are physically connected to remotely
order. This same type of control is used to select
located VistaMax frames (typically located in the
session files and select alternate monitor sources
terminal or rack room) or to other networked
for the control room and studio.
RMXdigital and BMXdigital consoles located else-
Once the desired source is shown in the display
and the Next LED is still lit, firmly press Take to
where in the facility.
To a console operator, a VistaMax system con-
select the new source. If the Next LED goes out
sists of two parts: sources and destinations. A
before Take is pressed, the display reverts to the
source is simply an analog or a digital signal from
current source name and no source change is per-
a satellite receiver, a Telco interface, a remote traf-
formed.
3-9
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
3
Operation
be used in the console, depending upon how the
VistaMax sources can also be routed directly
console was configuration during installation.
by loading a session file with the desired VistaMax
sources preassigned to the input channels. Vis-
The Telco foldback signal with talk allows the
taMax sources can also be directed to in-room re-
board operator to talk to any caller or remote by
cording devices by using a rack mount VistaMax
pressing that channel’s Talkback button while talk-
source selector panel in similar fashion.
ing to the caller or remote through the board
To route a console signal to a VistaMax location
operator’s microphone (pre-fader and pre-switch).
requires only that the source name be “published”
The Telco channel’s clean feed output is typically
(which is a setup function that simply lists the
used as a guest headphone feed or as a remote site
sources that each destination can select from).
program feed.
When a destination has a source published to it,
The bus source for the two foldback outputs is
that source name shows up in the next source list
indicated by the “winking” program or offline bus
as the source selector is turned on the console or
assignment button on each Telco channel. The bus
on a VistaMax selector panel.
used is determined by which buses are assigned
For a more complete description of the VistaMax
and by the status of the AUTO F/B button, which
audio management system, see the VistaMax
when lit uses the Telco channel’s state (channel
manual (Harris # 75-52).
On or Off) to automatically select which bus is
used as the foldback source.
TELCO / CODEC OPERATION
All program bus foldback feeds are derived post-
Up to six channels in an RMXdigital can be
switch and post-fader. The Offline bus foldback
designated as Telco channels 1 - 6. The term Telco,
feed is pre-switch and is set as pre-fader or post-
at least in the RMXdigital, generically refers to
fader in the session file.
any type or model of remote send/receive device,
Auto-Foldback On
which includes telephone hybrids, satellite trans-
When the AUTO
ceivers and ISDN codecs.
When a channel is set as a Telco, several changes
F/B button is lit, as
occur including activating two buttons on the
shown adjacent, that
channel strip: AUTO F/B (Automatic foldback)
Telco
and TALKBACK (which lights up). Bus assign-
foldback mix auto-
ments on Telco channels not only assign the chan-
matically toggles be-
nel input to one or more buses, they also affect the
tween an assigned
foldback signal returned to the Telco device as
program bus, while
detailed in the following sections.
the channel is On,
channel’s
and the Offline bus,
while the channel is
TELCO FOLDBACK MIX
Off, using this bus
There are two mono foldback signals (alternately
priority:
termed IFB, for Interruptible Foldback, or mixminus signals) associated with each Telco chan-
While the Chan-
nel. One output adds talkback audio over the mix-
nel is On: PGM 1 is
minus feed, while the second is a “clean feed”with-
the foldback mix
out talkback. Either or both of these outputs may
source. If it’s not as3-10
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
FOLDBACK
SOURCE with
AUTO F/B lit
& channel On
FOLDBACK
SOURCE with
AUTO F/B lit
& channel Off
3
signed, then the source is selected in bus order;
ing a live remote
PGM 2, PGM 3, PGM 4, then Offline.
where a “broad-
While the Channel is Off: The Offline bus is the
cast” feed to the
foldback mix bus. If it’s not assigned (unlit), then
remote site is re-
there is no foldback audio—except for talkback.
quired.
In a remote
Auto-Foldback On is the most common setting
broadcast, when
for call-in contests or interviews where the caller
the remote talent
also goes live on-air. Typically, only the talent mic
goes between be-
channel and the caller’s Telco channel are assigned
ing off-air and
to Offline.While the Telco channel is Off, the caller
on-air,
can hear the talent thru their mic feeding the
foldback
Offline bus. The talent can hear the caller by lis-
shouldn’t change.
tening to Telco monitor or by putting the Telco
In this case select
channel into cue. In this setup, the talent mic is
only PGM 1 on
live all the time it is assigned to Offline.
the Telco channel
Operation
Foldback
Source
when
AUTO F/B
is not lit
the
mix
Channel
status does
not change
the foldback
source.
If, while the caller is waiting to go on-air, they
and the PGM 1
must listen to something like a “contest rules and
foldback will al-
regulations” recording, then it is best to only as-
ways be sent to the remote, regardless of whether
sign the recording playback channel and the caller
the channel is On or Off. If a special remote broad-
to Offline. The talent can then press the caller’s
cast mix is required, construct it using the Offline
Talkback button to talk to the caller, or can mo-
bus and it will be the foldback feed, regardless of
mentarily assign their mic to Offline to talk to the
the program bus assignments and whether the
caller without pressing Talkback.
channel is On or Off.
When the caller then goes live on-air (the Telco
TELCO RECORD OUTPUT
channel is On), the foldback automatically switches
to PGM 1 (assuming the air feed is the Program 1
A two-channel Telco Record output, assigned
bus) so that the caller hears everything else going
during console configuration, sends a “caller” on
out on-air, but of course, minus their own voice.
the left output along with the “talent” on the right
output to an editor like a VoxPro®.
The “caller” output are those Telco channels that
Auto-Foldback Off
When Auto-Foldback is off (the AUTO F/B but-
are assigned as To Record Telcos by the session
ton is unlit), the Telco channel has a different bus
file. The “talent” output is a base mix of one pro-
priority order for selecting which is the foldback
gram bus or the Offline bus (the source for the
feed.
base mix is set using a bus priority order, just like
While the Channel is On or Off, the primary
how the foldback mix source is selected). Typi-
foldback source is Offline. If it is not assigned, then
cally, just the talent mic channel is assigned to the
the program buses are selected in order: PGM 1,
bus for the base mix, but any channels assigned
PGM 2, PGM 3, PGM 4.
to that bus will be recorded.
Auto-Foldback Off is the most common setting
The base mix bus is the highest priority bus
for recording callers for later broadcast or for do-
assigned on any To Record Telco—even if more
3-11
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
3
Operation
Note: Offline feeds from non-Telco channels are
lower priority buses are assigned on more To
Record Telco channels.
always pre-switch. They were set to Pre- or Post-
As in creating the foldback mix, the bus prior-
Fader during console setup. The Telco channels’
ity order changes when any To Record Telco has
Offline bus feeds can be separately set for Pre- or
AUTO F/B On. Since multiple channels could have
Post-Fader by session file settings.
AUTO F/B turned On, it is easiest to record call-
The Telco Record bus should be in the CR moni-
ers with AUTO F/B turned off on all Telco chan-
tor selector list and may be assigned to a monitor
nels or only set one Telco as the To Record Telco.
select button so it can easily be monitored since
To summarize, here are the two Telco recording
this is the other method to verify the correct Telco
priorities and what happens in each condition:
channels and talent signals are being recorded.
Recording Functions with Auto F/B
Off on all To Record Telcos
AUTO F/B is off on all To Record Telco channels:
The Base Mix source is Offline. If it is not assigned, then the program buses are used in order;
Base Mix Source
(feeds the right
channel of the
Telco Record
Output)
PGM 1, PGM 2, PGM 3, PGM 4.
If Offline is the base mix source, then it doesn’t
matter whether the channels are On or Off, all To
Record Telco channels will be recorded (as shown
in the adjacent illustration).
If a program bus is the base mix source, then
the To Record Telco channel must be On to record
the caller. If a To Record Telco channel is Off, then
that caller is NOT being recorded.
Channel On/Off
status does not
affect the Telco
Record Outputs
AUTO F/B is lit on at least one To Record Telco:
In this mode, the base mix source follows the
On/Off state of all of the To Record Telcos with
Recording Functions with Auto F/B
On—on any To Record Telco Channel
Auto F/B lit.When all of the Telcos with Auto F/B
lit are On, then PGM 1 is the primary base mix (if
it is not assigned then PGM 2, then PGM 3, then
Base mix source when
this channel is On
since Auto F/B is lit.
PGM 4, then Offline is used).
When any To Record Telco channel, with Auto
F/B lit is turned Off, then Offline is the base mix
Base mix source when
this channel is Off
since AUTO F/B is lit.
source and if it’s not assigned, no callers will be
recorded. This is summarized below.
Telco 1 feeds
the left channel of the
Telco Record Output,
regardless of channel
On/Off status.
TELCO RECORD OUTPUT SUMMARY
LEFT CHANNEL All Telco channels which are assigned
TO RECORD by the session file.
RIGHT All channels assigned to the Base Mix
CHANNEL bus, including those Telco modules
that are not assigned TO RECORD.
The Telco 1 channel
On/Off status changes
the base mix source
between Offline (when
Off ) and PGM 1 (when
On).
NOT Any channel NOT assigned to the Base
RECORDED Mix bus.
3-12
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
Since Auto F/B is un-lit,
this channel does not
affect the base mix source.
This channel will NOT be
recorded because the channel
is Off (which unassigns it from
the PGM 1 base mix, which is
the record base mix, since
Telco 1 is On).
If Telco 2 is turned On, then it will
feed the base mix (PGM 1) and it
will be recorded. Likewise, if
Telco 1 is turned Off while
Telco 2 is Off, then the Base Mix
changes to Offline and Telco 2
will feed the left channel of the
Telco Record Output.
RMXdigital
Server Setup
4
T
RMXd File Structure
a single-board computer (SBC) with an integral
folders to ensure proper operation. The following
The RMXdigital console’s setup and configu-
he RMXdigital Server physically consists of
ration files must be properly saved into specific
screen shot shows the folders and files in the useraccessible area of the flash disk. Except for
Flash Disk to store the operating system, configura-
Release.txt, all RMXd server files are located
within the Storage Card folder.
tion files, setup files and user-created session files.
The SBC is part of the KSU Card assembly.
The RMXdigital Server stores these file types:
• Sessions (.ses suffix)
• Macros (.mac suffix)
Files and Folders on the RMXdigital Server
• Console setup (.ini suffix)
• Console configuration (.cfg suffix)
An FTP program is used to access the console’s
The RMXdigital Server also functions as an FTP
flash disk. Internet Explorer can be used, but FTP
(File Transfer Protocol) server. This allows files to
Voyager, a dedicated FTP file management pro-
be easily transferred between a networked Win-
gram (a demo version is included on the 99-5000
dows® computer and the console using an FTP
CD-ROM), is recommended. The default factory
program. A computer networked with the console
IP address assigned to each RMXdigital console
is generically referred to as the “setup computer,”
is 192.168.100.22. Enter this IP address into the
which serves as the editing interface for the RMX-
FTP Site address field in FTP Voyager in order to
digital Server files.
view the console files on a new console.
All .ini and .cfg files on the RMXd Server
Inside the Storage Card folder is a Data folder,
are maintained using VistaMax Control Center
an nqx.ini file, and three other system files that
(VMCC)—an editor program included on the 99-
should not be changed. Inside the Data folder are
5000 CD-ROM. It is installed and runs on the setup
the SesFiles, SysFiles and Ref folders. The Ref
computer. Using the program is covered later in
folder is never changed.
this chapter and in Appendix A.
Because RMXdigital uses the same operating
system as BMXdigital consoles and VistaMax
frames, only one setup computer running VMCC
is required to maintain all of the files on all of the
VistaMax devices that are networked together in
Storage Card and Data folder contents
the VistaMax LAN.
4-1
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
SESFILES FOLDER
The SesFiles folder holds session and macro files.
The SysFiles folder holds these console config and
The SesFiles folder holds all of the user-created
setup files: ROUTERS.INI, INVENTORY.TXT,
session and macro files, and the init.mac file,
LOCAL_PUBLISH.CFG, EDGEDEVICE.INI,
which is a special macro file created and main-
SERVERID.TXT and, when the console is net-
tained using VMCC.
worked in a VistaMax System, a device publish
A session file is used to instantly change con-
file (Dx_PUBLISH.CFG) for other devices (con-
sole channel settings for particular dayparts or for
soles and racks) in the VistaMax community.
specific applications like voice tracking, production, newsroom use or on-air use. A session is cre-
RMXDIGITAL SERVER FILES OVERVIEW
ated by first selecting the channel sources and setting the channel button assignments as required
for a particular daypart or application. Pressing
RELEASE.TXT
This text file—stored at the top level of the flash
Save on the Monitor Control panel saves these con-
drive, lists the operating system version, build
sole settings as a new session file into the SesFiles
number and build date. This can be compared to
folder.
the current operating system build on the Harris
A session file is loaded into the console by first
FTP site (see page 5-1 for access details). The
using the Monitor Control panel’s rotary Session
release.txt file looks like this:
Selector to alphanumerically list the .ses files in
the SesFiles folder. With the desired session file
VistaMax Platform Version 4.20 [SJP]
CE.NET 4.2 + 2004 Q1 and Q2 QFEs applied
name displayed, press Take to load that session
#build 439 - built 08:04:2005 @ 14:38.39
into the console. This reconfigures the channel set-
Technology of Pacific Research & Engineering
Copyright 2003 - 2005 Harris Corp.
tings—except for those channels that are On, they
do not change to the new session settings until
they are turned Off to prevent any on-air signal
NQX.INI
This essential setup file is in the Storage Card
interruption.
folder. It is read as the SBC starts after power up,
Macro files are text files like sessions, but they
when the SBC Reset button is pressed or when
are not selected using the Session Selector. If a
the SBC is reset via an FTP command.
board operator would need to load a macro they
The file stores the console’s IP address, server
can be assigned to a router channel, otherwise they
name, device number and several other start-up
are loaded using FTP commands (either manu-
parameters. The file is maintained using VMCC.
ally using FTP Voyager or automatically by using
The most commonly edited file entries are cov-
the Task Scheduler program included on the 99-
ered in on page 4-5, RMXd Server Configuration.
5000 CD-ROM). Macro files have a .mac suffix.
PROVISIONED.HASH
INIT.MAC
This file is also in the Storage Card folder. It is
This text file is a special macro file maintained
created by VMCC, which uses it to determine which
by VMCC. It loads automatically each time the SBC
files are to be replaced when Distributing files.
starts up. It sets: default routes; default logic set-
Deleting this file will cause the next Distribute files
tings and logic I/O bindings to audio sources;
action to replace all files. This is equivalent to se-
monitor and meter selection button assignments;
lecting the Force Download option.
mute codes; and various audio input settings.
4-2
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
Editing session files as well as creating and ed-
Cards and control strips are listed by hex num-
iting macro files are covered in later sections of
bers (01 to 2c are the channel strips and phan-
this chapter and in Appendix A.
tom channels, b1 to b3 are the three sections of
the Monitor Control panel, 81 to 84 and 91 to 94
SYSFILES FOLDER
are the 8-Input Expansion cards and the KSU’s
The SysFiles folder holds the remaining con-
audio and logic connections). The numbers are the
sole configuration and initialization files. It also
hex equivalent of session file channel ID numbers.
has a number of files automatically maintained
by the RMXdigital server. These include route
ROUTERS.INI
persistence files (PF_xx.bin) that allow audio
This file, also maintained using VMCC, sets
routes to be automatically reestablished if power
which sources and destinations are available for
is lost to the console.
routing on a console. There are three sections to
the file: router definitions; source include list; des-
The following descriptions cover user files in the
tination include list, as shown below:
SysFiles folder:
[Routers]
; Router types supported: VistaMax
Type_1=VistaMax
;
[SrcInclude]
Include_1_1=D3.225-231
Include_1_2=D11.173-233,257-291
;
[DstInclude]
Include_1_1=D11.129-159,209-215
SERVERID.TXT
This text file lists the ID number of the KSU
card’s Single Board Computer (SBC). It consists
of a single line of text:
Server ID is 123-456-789.
The number (e.g., 123-456-789) is the Server
Headers ([Routers], [SrcInclude],
ID for that particular SBC. This number can be
[DstInclude]) define the sections. [Routers]
given to a Harris tech support representative in
sets whether a VistaMax or another type of router
order to receive a License Code (entered into
is networked with the console. [SrcInclude]
VMCC) to unlock optional extended features on a
(Source Include) lists all of the input signals that
specific console.
could be shown on the channel strips’ source selectors. In the example above, only signals 225231 on device 3 and signals 173-233 and 257-
INVENTORY.TXT
291 on device 11 would be shown in the source
This text file lists the Dual Fader panels plugged
selectors.
into the console and how many DSP cards are in
the frame (the KSU card counts as one DSP). This
DstInclude (Destination Include) lists the
information is updated whenever the console is
destinations that are available to Edge Devices
restarted or a card or channel strip is removed or
served by the console. In the example, the only
changed. The inventory is also saved in the Map-
destinations that would be shown on a VM-SDS
ping section of each session file.
(source/destination selector) would be those on
device 11, destinations 129-159 and 209-215.
Map_0_to_7=00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
Map_8_to_15=08 09 0a 0b 0c 0d 0e 0f
Map_16_to_23=20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Map_24_to_31=28 41 42 43 44 29 2a 2b
Map_32_to_39=2c b1 b2 b3 ff 91 81 92
Map_40_to_47=82 93 83 94 84 ff b4 ff
DSP=4
Each include statement line lists sources from a
single VistaMax device. However, when there are
a lot of sources from one device, there could be
multiple Include_x= statement lines for that
one device.
Typical RMXd-28 INVENTORY.TXT file contents
4-3
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
the KSU B analog output). The right hand but-
EDGEDEVICE.INI
This file, maintained using VMCC, configures
tons are conversely set as six destination selectors
edge devices (console or rack-mount source or
(Button_2_1 thru 6) for signals 245 - 255: the
source/destination selector panels) that receive
KSU C and D analog outputs and the four KSU
their information from the RMXdigital Server. An
digital outputs).
Each destination covered by the edge device has
edgedevice.ini file example, for a single VM-
an included signal list (identified by the Include_1
SSD selector panel, is shown below:
and the Include_2 entries). Again, all of these en-
[System]
;===========================================================================
;TimeServerIP=192.168.100.11:123;
;LogServerIP=192.168.100.11:514; ;
;VMCommunityIP=234.5.6.7:5100;default value
;
;===========================================================================
[EdgeDeviceIndex]
;===========================================================================
EdgeDevice_1=00-60-35-01-e8-ff
; SS_1_6_Dst
;
;===========================================================================
[00-60-35-01-e8-ff]
; SS_1_6_Dst
;===========================================================================
EXEFile=rced/rced.tini
;Location of tini
FTPServerIP=192.168.100.22 ;server IP address
DeviceIP=192.168.100.201
;edge IP address
DeviceMask=255.255.255.0
;Device mask
GatewayIP=0.0.0.0
;Gateway
LogServerEnable=1
;ServerName=RMXd_1;
DeviceName=SS_1_6_Dst
;Edge device name
VMServerIP=192.168.100.22:4001 ;IP add:port#
;
Destination_1=D1.243
;
Include_1_1_1=D2.225-231
Include_1_1_2=D3.71,77,129,131
Include_1_1_3=D1.173,175,225,227,257-291
;
Include_2_1_1=D1.257-271
Include_2_2_1=D2.225
Include_2_2_2=D3.71,77,129,131
Include_2_2_3=D1.225
Include_2_3_1=D1.273-287
Include_2_4_1=D2.225-231
Include_2_4_2=D1.225,227,233,289,291
Include_2_5_1=D1.273-287,337,339
Include_2_6_1=D1.257-271
;
;Button Assignments =============
Button_1_1=D3.71
Button_1_2=D3.129
Button_1_3=D3.131
Button_1_4=D1.225
Button_1_5=D1.273
Button_1_6=D1.275
;
Button_2_1=D1.245
Button_2_2=D1.247
Button_2_3=D1.249
Button_2_4=D1.251
Button_2_5=D1.253
Button_2_6=D1.255
tries are set using the VMCC program, covered later
in this chapter and in Appendix A.
LOCAL_PUBLISH.CFG
This file, again created by VMCC following the
parameter entries entered into the program, lists
all of the sources and destinations on the console
by their In Room Names. It further identifies
whether the signal is hidden or not and whether it
is stereo linked. The following example of a
local_publish.cfg file shows just a portion
of the KSU card audio signals:
;AudioSrc Card#: 46
src=161,MM1L
src=162,MM1R
src=163,MM2L
src=164,MM2R
src=165,{MM3,166
src=166,{MM3R
src=167,{MM4,168
src=168,{MM4R
;
;AudioDst Card#: 46
dst=241,KSU A ALG,242
dst=242,{NA1R
dst=243,KSU B ALG,244
dst=244,{NA2R
dst=245,KSU C ALG,246
dst=246,{NA3R
dst=247,KSU D ALG,248
dst=248,{NA4R
Each line identifies one signal as either a source
(src=) or a destination (dst=), along with two
characteristics: whether the signal is hidden and
Although edge devices are typically served by a
whether it is mono or stereo. For example, the first
VistaMax frame, they can be served by a console,
source shown: src=161,MM1L, identifies signal
as shown above. This is typically only done when
161 as the left mix-minus signal for Telco 1. It is a
the controlled destinations are the console’s KSU
mono signal since the next entry (src=162,MM1R)
card outputs. As shown, a dual selector panel (VM-
is not linked to the previous entry by a ,162 at
SSD) is configured so that the left buttons (identi-
the end of the entry. Both signal 161 and 162 are
fied as Button_1_1 thru 6) are hot source keys to
available and are not hidden (an open bracket, {,
control the source for destination 1 (signal 243:
placed in front of the name hides that signal from
4-4
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
RMXd Server Configuration
being selected or seen by the other VistaMax community devices).
The first destination signal that is shown
Several software programs must be installed on
(dst=241,KSU A ALG, 242) identifies the sig-
the setup computer in order to configure the RMX-
nal as the A analog output of the KSU (signal 241);
digital server files. These programs are supplied
that its displayed name is KSU A ALG; and that
on the 99-5000 CD-ROM. They can also be down-
the signal is stereo linked to the next signal (by
loaded from the Harris FTP site (see page 5-1 in
the ,242 at the end of the entry).
Maintenance for FTP access details).
The “right channel” of the KSU A analog output
COMMUNITY MONITOR
(dst=242,{NA1R) is hidden because of the { (open
bracket) in front of the signal name. On stereo sig-
Community Monitor (CM) runs as a process on
nals the right channel is always hidden by default.
the setup computer (it initially appears as only a
tray icon:
. Right-click on the icon and select
Show Monitor Display).
Dx_PUBLISH.CFG
As part of a VistaMax system, each console and
The Community Monitor listens to communi-
frame has a unique device number assigned in its
cations on the VistaMax LAN from all VistaMax
nqx.ini file. In order for a device to know what
community members. It obtains such parameters
sources are available from other devices, a Device
as IP address, device name and MAC address for
Publish file is created by VMCC in the form of
each community member. It also writes a text file
Dx_publish.cfg where x is the console’s de-
on
vice number. The example below shows the same
Monitor.txt, that identifies each community
section as the local_publish file shown previously:
member. This file is updated with each commu-
the
setup
computer,
Community
nity member change. Thus, CM should always be
;AudioSrc Card#: 46
src=161,11.MM1
src=162,11.MM1R
src=163,11.MM2
src=164,11.MM2R
src=165,{11.MM3,166
src=166,{11.MM3R
src=167,{11.MM4,168
src=168,{11.MM4R
;
;AudioDst Card#: 46
dst=241,11.NA1,242
dst=242,{11.NA1R
dst=243,11.NA2,244
dst=244,{11.NA2R
dst=245,11.NA3,246
dst=246,{11.NA3R
dst=247,11.NA4,248
dst=248,{11.NA4R
run prior to inspecting a community in VMCC.
VISTAMAX CONTROL CENTER
The VistaMax Control Center (VMCC) is the user
interface for editing and maintaining the settings
of the various RMXd server setup files (nqx.ini,
init.mac, edgedevice.ini, routers.ini,
local_publish.cfg and dx_publish.cfg)
so the console fits into a particularVistaMax community. This is covered in more detail throughout
the remainder of this chapter.
VMCC distributes a device publish file to every
The VMCC program (icon:
other device in the community. The file is like the
) not only sets
local_publish.cfg file except that the names
up and maintains files for any RMXdigital con-
consist of: the Call Group entry (11 in the example
sole—it also does the same thing for all VistaMax
above), the community Name Radix entry (a pe-
community members (any RMXdigital or BMX-
riod in the example above) and the four-character
digital console, VistaMax rack or VistaMax edge
Community Name (as defined in the VMCC Sig-
device connected to the LAN). It also automati-
nal Summary).
cally updates each interdependent file when any
4-5
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
CONFIGURATION PREREQUISITES
change is made, automatically deciding how each
community member reacts to the new download
The following items are required before the
files—when the nqx.ini file is changed, the con-
RMXdigital Server can be configured for a spe-
sole must be restarted; when a publish file or the
cific VistaMax system:
routers.ini file is changed, an Init Router pro-
• A setup computer running Windows® 98/
cedure must be run to read the new files; and an
NT/2000/Me/XP with one 10Base-T or
Init RCED must be run to restart edge devices
100Base-T Ethernet port assigned to a fixed
when the edgedevice.ini file changes. VMCC
IP address of 192.168.100.11.
allows for staggered file distribution, so that on-
• A crossover or a straight-thru CAT-5 cable
air consoles can be updated in non-drive time, even
(depends upon the type of connection be-
if a production room has already been updated.
tween the setup computer and the console).
• A fixed IP address that can be assigned to
FTP VOYAGER
the RMXdigital Server for use within the
VistaMax local area network.
A program demo is included on the CD-ROM.
• An installed and working RMXd console.
This is the best FTP file transfer program to use
on a VistaMax system. The program transfers ses-
If unsure of network configuration procedures,
sion and macro files between a console and the
check with a network administrator.
setup computer, where they can be manually ed-
There are the two methods of connecting the
setup computer to the RMXd Server:
ited using Notepad, and then can upload them
back to the console or frame. The program is also
useful for downloading files from the Harris FTP
Direct Connection
site.
1 Connect a crossover CAT-5 cable between the
KSU card’s Ethernet connector and the
3CDAEMON
Ethernet port assigned to IP 192.168.100.11
on the setup computer.
This program has a syslogger to monitor the
VistaMax network operations. Another main function is to serve as a TFTP server so that new oper-
Connecting Thru a Network Switch*
ating system code can be easily uploaded to a Vis-
1 Connect a straight-thru CAT-5 cable from the
taMax device during start-up.
KSU card’s Ethernet connector to an open port
on the network switch.
Each of these programs has a readme.txt file on
2 Connect a straight-thru CAT-5 cable from the
the 99-5000 CD-ROM (and the FTP site) with full
Ethernet port on the setup computer to another
installation and setup information.
open port on the network switch.
* A network hub could be used during installation, but it is not recommended for normal use.
Only a network switch should be used. Before
making this connection make sure that the
console’s IP address (the default address assigned at the factory is 192.168.100.22) does
not conflict with an existing network address.
4-6
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
INITIAL CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
To change which port CM uses, click Options,
This procedure requires that both CM and
then select Setup. If 192.168.100.11 is not
VMCC be installed on the setup computer; that
shown in the Community Local IP address win-
the RMXdigital console is installed and powered
dow, click the window’s down arrow, select that
up using the factory IP setting of 192.168.100.22;
address, then close and restart CM.
and that the setup computer and the RMXdigital
Once the new RMXdigital console is shown
in the CM display, the setup computer is prop-
are networked together.
erly communicating with the new console.
1 Start Community Monitor
Click the desktop icon (
) on the setup com2 Start VMCC (desktop icon:
puter to start Community Monitor. This adds a
)
miniature icon to the taskbar tray. Right-click
The first time VMCC starts up, no community
on the tray icon to select Show Monitor Dis-
is displayed. Click the Tools menu and select
play. An example is shown below:
New Community to start setting up a new community. Use the illustration below to identify
the VMCC user interface features.
The Editing pane, in the middle of the program window, allows global parameters for the
Community Monitor display
VistaMax community to be set when the comThe new console should be shown in the dis-
munity name is highlighted in the Community
play with an IP address of 192.168.100. 22. If
Explorer pane along the left side. These param-
the console is not shown, then CM may be lis-
eters include naming the new community and
tening to the wrong Ethernet port on the setup
changing the administrator address (which uses
computer.
the setup computer’s IP address: 192.168.
Editing Pane
Community Explorer Pane
Community Summary Pane
Menu items
(File, Edit, Tools)
Hide Summary
Pane button
Community Name
To Reorder Summary List,
click #, Address, or Name
Community Devices
R = RMXdigital
B=BMXdigital
E= Edge device
Active Device
(parameters shown in
the editing pane)
Left Pane Activity
Selection Tabs
Saved Status Flag
Saving Database Icon
VMCC, graphical interface features
4-7
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
100.11). The other settings can be left at their
box to add the check mark). Click the Inspect
default settings at this time.
button to inspect the console’s information.The
The Editing pane is also where configuration
information line shows “done” when the inspec-
parameters for the consoles, racks, panels, cards
tion is completed. Click Continue to move to
and signals are shown and edited. Which set of
the window showing the inspection results.With
parameters are currently shown is set by high-
a new console there will be no slot conflicts or
lighting the item in the Community Explorer
critical issues, so click the Accept button.
pane. The Explorer pane uses a tree structure
After a few seconds the console shows up as a
to expand and collapse items as required. Click
new community member in the Community
the + button next to a console name expands
Explorer pane along the left side of the win-
its tree to show individual panels and cards and
dow. This pane shows each device in the Vis-
a Signal Summary. Clicking the - button col-
taMax community.
lapses the tree, hiding the items.
Along the right side of the VMCC screen is a
4 Edit Console Settings
Community Summary pop-open window that
Click once on the console’s name in the Com-
lists the IP address, device number and name
munity Explorer pane to highlight the name.
for each community member. It is most often
This switches the editing pane to show Device
used when creating a community or when add-
parameters where a unique device name, unique
ing new community members. The Community
device number and a unique IP address for the
Summary can be hidden by clicking on the
RMXd console are set.
upper right push-pin icon. The summary win-
Additional parameters, which affect how this
dow can also be dragged to another location
device interacts with the other consoles and
within the main program window.
racks in the VistaMax community, are also set
in the Device pane. Setting the device param-
3 Inspect the VistaMax Community
eters are covered in the Configuration Notes and
Click the VMCC File menu item, then select
Tips later in this chapter.
Inspect Community. A community inspection
window opens to show all the VistaMax devices
5 Provision Files
Once the console parameters are edited as re-
detected—which in this case should be only one,
the new RMXdigital console.
quired, the new settings must be used to create
If the console is not found, then the VMCC
new console configuration files. Creating the
VistaMax Network Interface setting may need
configuration files is called Provisioning. Click
to be changed under the Tools menu. Click Tools,
the Provisioning tab at the bottom of the Com-
then select Options. In the Option window, click
munity Explorer pane to switch the display to
the Administration tab. In the VistaMax Net-
show the provisioning panes.
work Interface list box, click the down arrow
The provisioning panes have only two but-
to list the NIC cards on the setup computer.
tons at the top: Provision and Distribute... Click-
Select the 192.168.100.11 card, click OK, and
ing the Provision button creates the setup and
reinspect the community.
configuration files from the parameters entered
Verify there’s a check mark under the Inspect
in the editing pane, as required for the console.
heading for the RMXd console (doubleclick the
The provisioned files can be double checked in
4-8
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
the middle pane by clicking the + button next
to the My Documents folder. If necessary, change
to the console name to drop down a list of the
folders, then click Save. When Normal or Force
setup files VMCC created.
Download was selected, VMCC opens a Device
Specific Distribution window, while checking
that it can communicate with the various community devices. This window also lists the action that will be taken after the files are distributed. To send the files the device must be enabled (doubleclick on the Enable boxes to add
a check mark).
Provisioned File List
for RMXdigital
Clicking on a file name displays the file contents in the provision editor pane. Even though
files can be manually edited in the provision
editor pane, this should NOT be done on a normal basis as the edits will be overwritten the
Device-Specific Distribution List Window
next time the Provision button is clicked.
Click Distribute to download the provisioned
files to the enabled devices. If nqx.ini has
6 File Distribution
After double-checking the provisioned files,
changed (as shown above for BMXd_3), the
the final step is to distribute the provisioned
console will be reset. If Force Download was
files to the console. Clicking the Distribute...
selected in the previous screen, then every de-
button opens a dialog box with the three dis-
vice will“Reestablish Device Identity (RESET).”
tribution options: perform a normal console
When the publish files have changed, then an
download (where only changed files are re-
initialize router will be performed (as shown
placed on the console); perform a force down-
above on VMaxRack9 and RMXd_11). If the
load (where all console files are replaced by the
edgedevice.ini file has changed the an initialize
files provisioned by VMCC); or save the provi-
RCED (Remote Control Edge Devices) will be
sioned files to the setup computer’s hard drive.
performed so that the edge devices will read
the updated information.
Now that a community has been created, adding new community members is a matter of opening up the community and, following steps 3 thru
6, add each new console or frame following the
recommendations and tips presented in the fol-
File Distribution Selection window in VMCC
lowing sections. For additional information on
VMCC refer to Appendix A.
Click a radio button to select the distribution
method, then click the Next button. If Local
Download is selected, a save dialog box opens
4-9
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
CONFIGURATION NOTES AND TIPS
work. Always confirm all IP addressing choices
with a knowledgable network administrator.
If a console is not networked with a VistaMax
system, it could continue to use the factory de-
Before the setup computer can access the RMXd
fault IP address (192.168.100.22). In such a case,
Server, its IP address must be changed so it is in-
a network switch is not required since the setup
side the local subnet mask assigned to the RMXd
computer could be directly connected to the con-
Server. The default IP address for the console, as
sole, using a crossover CAT-5 cable, whenever any
shipped from the factory, is 192.168.100.22 with
files require editing.
a default subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.
With multiple RMXdigital consoles, BMXdigi-
Note: If the IP address has been changed and is
tal consoles, VistaMax racks and VistaMax Edge
not known, it can be recovered using a serial port
Devices networked together, it is essential that a
connection. See Settings Recovery on page 4-27.
list of all devices on the VistaMax LAN be kept so
Contact a network administrator if additional
that nonconflicting IP addresses can be assigned
information is required to change the setup
and set on each device before connecting them to
computer’s IP address.
the network switch. Sequentially list network de-
NQX.INI FILE SETTINGS
vices (consoles, racks, edge devices, switches and
computers), assigning a unique IP address and,
These are the nqx.ini file settings that are set
for the consoles and VistaMax racks, assigning
using the VMCC program (highlight the console
unique device names and numbers (from 1 to 63).
name in the Explorer pane to show these settings).
Device Name
Here is a suggested network addressing scheme,
Enter a unique Device Name to
using the default 192.168.100.xxx addresses, for
identify the console. It can have a maximum of
assigning devices in easy-to-remember blocks of
ten alphanumeric characters, but it cannot con-
IP addresses:
tain spaces or any special characters. This entry sets the NAME= parameter in the nqx.ini
file.
Suggested IP Addressing for a VistaMax LAN
Networked Device
Network switches, local computers
IP Address
192.168.100.1 up to .10
Device Number Enter a unique number, from 1
to 63, to identify the console as a VistaMax de-
default TFTP server (setup computer)
computer)192.168.100.11
vice. The number used is typically related to
spare addresses
192.168.100.12 up to .21
default console IP address
192.168.100.22 *
spare addresses
192.168.100.23 up to .32
default VVistaMax
istaMax frame IP address
192.168.100.33 *
spare addresses
192.168.100.34 up to .40
Device_number= parameter in the nqx.ini
VistaMax frames
192.168.100.41 up to .49
file.
VistaMax Intercoms
192.168.100.50 up to .100
Consoles (RMXd or BMXd)
192.168.100.101 up to .199
have a unique fixed IP address. The first three
VistaMax Edge Devices
192.168.100.200 up to .299
octets (e.g. 192.168.100.xxx) are identical for
* to avoid conflicts when adding a new console or frame,
do not assign these addresses to any LAN device.
all devices in the system. The last octet identi-
the console IP address (e.g., if the console IP is
set as 192.168.100.122, the device number
would be set to 22). This entry sets the
Device Address Each console and frame must
fies the device. See the suggested IP Address-
Note: Major network communications problems
ing Table adjacent for suggested addresses. This
will occur if two devices are assigned the same IP
entry sets the NET_IP= parameter in the
address and are plugged in together on the net-
nqx.ini file.
4-10
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
CONSOLE SIGNAL SETUP
Subnet Mask Typically, the default subnet mask
(255.255.255.0) is left as is. Check with a
Having configured the nqx.ini file means the
network administrator before making any
RMXdigital console can safely be networked with
changes to the subnet mask.
other VistaMax devices in the community—but it
This is normally left at the
doesn’t mean the console is “ready for air” yet.
default setting (0.0.0.0) to prevent external
There are a number of source and destination
access to the VistaMax LAN. Again, check with
parameters that need to be set properly to inte-
a network administrator before making any
grate a console into a VistaMax community:
Gateway Address
changes to the gateway address.
1. In Room names, Community Names and signal descriptions can be edited to specifically iden-
These are all of the entries that must be changed
tify the signals.
by VMCC in order to add a new RMXdigital con-
2. The signal mode (stereo or mono) needs to be
sole into an existing VistaMax community.
set. All user inputs and outputs defaults are ste-
An additional entry (Licenses) may be required
reo (odd number signals are Linked to the Next
if customized features must be unlocked. The Li-
even numbered signal), but any could be changed
cense Code is entered into the Licenses dialog box
to mono.
3. Set whether a signal is Hidden (cannot be
located near the bottom of the console editing pane.
seen by other community members). Hidden signals cannot be a routed source or destination.
4. Assign a Mute Code (to mute a monitor output when the signal is active) on inputs.
5. Associate (or bind) audio inputs to logic I/O
connections for logic control of a remote panel or
Device License Entry Box
a peripheral device when the audio signal is routed
There are two parts to a License Code: the fea-
to a channel strip.
6. Set any input gain trims (+15.5 dB or -16 dB
ture name and the code number. The feature name
from 0 dBu in .5 dB steps).
is the name of the License (automation, router,
control extension, etc.). The code number is a nine-
7. Set whether the signal phase gets inverted.
digit number (e.g., 123-456-789).
8. Set whether the signal is added on various
Include Lists.
To obtain a License, the Server ID number for
the console (listed in the serverid.txt file) must
be given to a Harris Technical Services or Sales
Representative so that they can generate a License
Code for that specific RMXdigital console.
When the nqx.ini file is provisioned and distributed, the console automatically restarts so that
Signal Summary Pane in VMCC
the file changes can take effect. Use Community
Monitor to verify the new console was setup cor-
Some of these settings are done in the Signal
rectly. CM will list the console name, device num-
Summary pane (shown above). To open it, click
ber and its IP address.
the console name + button to open its tree, click
4-11
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
the Signal Summary + button and then highlight
or Description and edit them as required. If too
either Sources or Destinations. This pane is where
many characters are entered or if an illegal char-
signal names are assigned, mono/stereo selection
acter is entered, a red exclamation point and
is set and setting whether a signal is hidden or
error warning box will be shown so the error
available is made.
can be corrected.
Additional signal settings are done in the signal
detail pane. This pane is opened by selecting a
specific source or destination signal. In the example
below, the KSU A Analog input is shown. To view
Name Length Error in VMCC
this pane, click the KSU-Audio I/O + button to
open the KSU tree, click the Sources + button,
then highlight the desired signal name.
Signal Format (Stereo or Mono)
All AMP MOD IV audio connectors on the
RMXd carry two signals. By default, each is
set as a stereo connection, with the left signal
being assigned an odd signal number and the
right signal being assigned the next even signal
number. This ensures the two signals are treated
as one source or destination for proper phase,
timing and routing of the two signals.
This stereo relationship is set by a check mark
in the column Link w/Next. The check mark
Signal Detail Pane in VMCC
sets the signal as stereo linked with the next
The following parameters can be edited in
signal. Typically this is only done on the odd-
either the Signal Summary pane or the Signal De-
numbered signals so that a stereo signal is on
tail pane:
one connector.
To change a stereo signal into a pair of mono
signals, remove the check mark in the Link w/
In Room and Community Names, Description
The In Room Name identifies the signal in
Next column by double-clicking on it. The two
the channel strip source selectors using up to
signals will now be treated as two separate
nine alphanumeric characters.
mono signals. When a mono signal is routed to
The Community Name is a four-character
a channel strip, it automatically appears on both
name to identify the signal on other commu-
the left and right outputs of the channel strip.
nity members’ console or edge device source
selectors. It follows the Call Group prefix (which
Hidden Signals
is set in the console pane) and the Name Radix
Each console has many signals that are set
(set in the community pane).
as Hidden. These include each stereo signal’s
The description helps to identify the signal to
right channel (which is hidden so that only the
other VMCC users.
left channel name shows up in source selectors)
To enter the signal names and definitions,
and all of the internal console-only signals (sev-
click on the In Room Name, Community Name
eral mix-minus primitive and talkback signals).
4-12
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
A Hidden signal has a check mark in the
with a Ready command output to indicate sta-
Hidden column. This means it is not available
tus of the device. The Off lamp on the channel
to be added to any signal include list. For most
strip that this signal is routed to will then be
installations, the default settings for Hidden will
controlled by the incoming Ready logic com-
work fine. To change the Hidden status,
mand. A solid Off light indicates the source is
doubleclick on the check mark to remove it, or
ready to play. A blinking Off light indicates the
doubleclick in the empty box to add a check
source is paused or that it has completed play-
mark.
ing the track or segment. Note that only the
left channel of a stereo pair needs to have the
Enable box checked.
A quick way to set the check marks for an entire console is to click once to highlight any column entry and then use the keyboard space bar
Start/Stop Pulse Control
to check or uncheck that check box. Use the up
This setting is only used on signals from pe-
and down arrow keys to quickly move through
ripheral devices that are bound to logic. When
the list, pressing the spacebar as required to change
the channel strip that this signal is routed to is
check mark status.
turned On, a start pulse is output to start the
peripheral. Likewise, when the channel strip is
turned Off, a stop pulse is output to pause or
The following entries can only be set in the
stop the peripheral.
Signal Detail pane:
The Start and Stop Pulse outputs are set for
one of four logic conditions: Local State Change
Input Gain and Trim
Nominal console inputs are +4 dBu for ana-
causes one pulse to be output whenever the
log and -20 dBFS for digital. The Gain control
channel is changed from Off to On (one start
allows signals to be raised by up to +16 dB (to
pulse is output) or from On to Off (one stop
compensate for an unbalanced analog input or
pulse is output); Local or Remote Change per-
low signal level) or trimmed by up to -15.5 dB
forms the same logic functions but it also re-
(to compensate for hotter-than-normal outputs).
sponds to remote logic On/Off commands; Lo-
Gain and trim is set in .5 dB steps. Note that
cal Actuation causes a start or stop pulse to be
gain and trim is set independently for each
output each time the On or Off button is pressed,
channel of a stereo pair.
regardless of the channel state; Local or Remote Actuation adds multiple start or stop pulse
outputs in response to remote logic On/Off com-
Invert Phase
mands.
A check mark in the Invert Phase box inverts the phase of the signal. Note that phase
invert is set independently on each channel of
Room Code
This setting is only used with microphones
a stereo pair.
in order to associate the mic to a specific room
in the facility in order to properly mute moni-
Ready Controls Off Lamp
tor outputs and trigger hot mic warning signs.
A check mark in the Enable box says that
this signal is coming from a peripheral device
A Room Code (a number from 1 to 127) is
like a CD player or a digital delivery system
assigned to each room in the facility with mi4-13
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
crophones. The appropriate Room Code is then
Select Monitor/Meter Include Lists & Sources
set on each mic input. When the mic is routed
There are three columns of seven buttons on
to a channel strip, its room code is compared
the monitor module to select the Aux Meter
with the assigned room codes on the console so
source, the Control Room monitor source and
that the appropriate monitor output is muted
the Studio monitor source. In addition, there
and the correct warning command is output
are two source selectors to select an alternate
while the mic channel is On.
source for the Control Room and the Studio.
The remaining signal entries are set in the Console pane. Highlight the console name, then
scroll up or down to see these items.
Create Console Include Lists
Only those signals without checkmarks in the
Setting Meter and Monitor Include Lists
and Selector Button Sources
Hidden column can be added to an include list.
An Include List is the master signal source or
destination list for a console. The source include
Each selector button is assigned a bus or a
list sets which signals are available for routing
routed signal in VMCC. Up to fifteen routed sig-
(e.g. which ones are shown in the source selec-
nals can be set for each Monitor and Meter In-
tor displays). The destination include list sets
clude list. Any one of these routed signals can
which destinations can have signals routed to
then be assigned to a button. The ones not as-
them. This typically only affects edge devices
signed to a monitor button are called up using
(e.g. Source Selector panels or Source/Desti-
the monitor source selector controls.
Buttons have default sources assigned (PGM
nation selector panels) since the console does
1 thru PGM 4, Send, Real Air) by VMCC, but
not have any destination selection device.
any button can be reassigned, and relabeled, as
needed. The monitor and meter include lists are
set just like the console include lists by highlighting a device, selecting which signals should
be assigned, then clicking the double right arrow (>>) key to add them to the list. Note that
Setting Signal Include Lists
each of these lists can only have fifteen sources
in their include lists.
To create the signal lists, first highlight a Device name. All of the unhidden sources or des-
To remove any sources from the Include List,
tinations on that device are shown in the Avail-
highlight the signals then click the double left
able Signals box. Using standard Windows se-
arrow key (<<).
lection techniques, select the desired signals,
then click the double right arrow key (>>) to
Assign Room Mute Codes
add these signals to the Include Signals list. Re-
Each console has three monitor outputs that
peat for the other devices.To remove any sources
can be muted (CR, Studio 1 and External) to
from the Include List, highlight the signals then
prevent “hot mics” from feeding back through
click the double left arrow key (<<).
in-room monitor speakers. A numeric code
4-14
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
(from 1 to 127), called the Room Code, is as-
not occur. Both Real Air and Synthetic Air de-
signed to each room. When this code is also
fault to PGM 1 if there are no selections made.
assigned to a mic input, when that mic is routed
To use automatic monitor switching, Real Air
to a channel strip, and the channel is turned
must be used as the control room monitor
On, the appropriate room output mutes.
source. It is the default signal assigned to the
top button on the monitor selection buttons.
Assign Ext. Cue & Ext. Talk to CR Sources
These two signal selections—just below the
Room Code Assignments
Real Air source selection box, assign two con-
Note: the Studio 2 entry is not used in RMXdigital.
sole or system inputs as the sources for an External Cue input and an External Talk to Con-
The room code entry boxes are just below
the Destination Include List entry.
trol Room input.
Assign Real Air & Synthetic Air Sources
These two signal settings are found just below the Room Mute Code settings.They are typically only set on on-air consoles that have a
several second profanity delay in the on-air sig-
Assigning the External Cue and External
Talk to Control Room Sources
nal path.
Assigning sources to these two signals tells
the control room monitor logic that it will au-
The External Talk signal could be from a Vis-
tomatically switch between the off-air signal
taMax intercom or from another switched
(called the Real Air source—used when no mic
source. The External talk to Control Room sig-
channel is On), and a non-delayed signal (called
nal is automatically routed to Phantom chan-
the Synthetic Air source—used whenever any
nel 3 to the Talk to CR bus, while the External
control room mic channel is On). The Synthetic
Cue signal is automatically routed to Phantom
Air source can simply be set to the PGM 1 bus,
channel 4 to the Cue bus. The phantom chan-
but more often it is the output of a backup air
nels are controlled by the Ext. Cue and Ext.
processor that simulates the processed sound
Talk to CR logic signals on the Cue/Talk/Ext
of the Real Air signal.
logic connector (see page 2-22 for connection
If no source is set in the Synthetic Air selec-
details).
tion box, then automatic signal switching does
Set Operational Parameters
There are seven operational functions that are
turned on by checking each function’s Enable
box (see illustration on the next page).
When Show Meter Average is checked, the
peak display is not shown on the meters. When
Offline Signal Post Fader is checked, the chan-
Assigning the Synthetic Air
and the Real Air Sources
nel fader affects the offline bus levels. Un4-15
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
Setting Operational
Parameters and
Output Sample
Rates
checked, the offline bus
tions, a session file on another device will also
is pre-fader. When Cue
need to be loaded, so it is also entered here.
Cancels With On is
In the example, mix-minus.ses is a setup
checked, turning any
file on device 3. It will be loaded after the
channel On turns off
daypart_0.ses file loads on the local con-
Cue on that channel.
sole (the Device # 0 entry indicates the file is
When Cue Lamp Blink
on the local device).
is checked, the cue but-
ADDITIONAL VMCC INFORMATION
tons blink while active.
When Cue Headphone
Appendix A has additional details on usingVMCC
is Split is checked, the CR Headphone audio is
to accomplish various system setup tasks. Examples
split and summed, with one ear having the
of system design and console setup commands are
monitor source and the other having cue.When
also presented with additional session file and macro
it is unchecked, cue is fed in stereo to the head-
file information beyond that covered in the remain-
phones, cutting off the monitor signal. When
ing section of this chapter.
Talkback to Cue is checked all Talk to CR signals also feed the cue speaker.When Dim Monitors on Talkback is checked, the monitors dim
by 12 dB while Talk to CR is active.
Just below the seven check boxes are five output sample rate selection boxes. They set the
sample rate for these digital outputs: the first
two KSU outputs (A and B), the first two program outputs (PGM 1 and PGM 2) and the
Send output. Each can be set for either 48 kHz
or 44.1 kHz. The other digital outputs have a
fixed 48 kHz sample rate output.
Chain to a Session File
After the operating system completes loading
at console start up, the init.mac file is loaded.
In the init.mac file, there’s a Chain Files section
where one or more session files can be listed to
automatically load after init.mac. Typically,
this is for a setup file to load that configures
the console for its standard function (air, production, voice tracking, etc.). In some applica-
Chain Files Entry Box
4-16
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
Session Files
Use a text-only editor (Windows® Notepad) to add
or update any session settings (e.g., changing the
Session files are text files with the suffix .ses.
default channel source, adding button lockout in-
Pressing Save on the Monitor Control panel saves
formation, etc.). This same computer could also be
the current console settings and source selections
used to perform other session management duties
as a new session file in the SesFiles folder on the
like renaming or deleting session files.
RMXdigital Server (storage card/DATA/
MAKING A TEMPLATE SESSION
SesFiles).
There is no limit to the number of session files
To simplify creating new sessions, it’s recom-
saved, however, since every session saved to the
mended that a session file be created with the most
SesFiles folder is listed in alphanumeric order on
common settings used on the console including
the Session Selector, only active session files should
channel source selections and button lockouts.This
be keep in this folder. Periodically use the setup
session file can then be placed in the SesFiles folder
computer to delete old or unused session files from
and used as a template to create new sessions by
the folder using FTP Voyager. Old sessions and
first Taking the template session, adjusting the
engineering test sessions could be kept in a folder
settings and then pressing Save to create a new
created inside the SesFiles folder since session files
session file.The session file would then be renamed
in this folder are not seen by the operator.
using the setup computer.
A new session is created by first setting the
console’s assignment buttons to reflect a particu-
The next sections cover recalling and loading
lar console function (e.g., a morning show, a mid-
sessions, saving sessions, downloading sessions for
day program, an interview show, etc.). The button
editing on a LAN-connected computer and up-
settings and source selections are then saved into
loading the sessions back to the RMXdigital Server
a new session by pressing Save on the Monitor
for operator use.
Control panel.
Recalling and Loading a Session
Each time Save is pressed, all of the current channel strip button settings and source names are saved
Use the Session Selector on the Monitor Control
to a new session file. If no session was loaded, the
panel to find previously saved session files in the
new session has the default file name:
SesFiles folder on the Storage Card. Session files
undefined.ses with a numeric suffix (e.g.,
are listed in alphanumeric order in the bottom line
undefine01.ses, undefine02.ses, etc.).
of the session display.
If a session was previously loaded, then the name
used is the current session name with a numbered
Session Currently loaded
suffix. Since session names are limited to 10 alpha-
Selected Session
numeric characters, the original session name will
be truncated as required (as in undefine01.ses)
Session Selector
to add the numbered suffix.
Take button
Save button
EDITING SESSION FILES
Once a session is saved, any LAN-connected com-
Monitor Control panel,
Session File Controls
puter can retrieve and edit the .ses file as required.
4-17
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
The
Rotate the Session selector clockwise (CW) to
newly
created
template
session
move up through the list. Rotate it counterclock-
(undefine01.ses) now contains the standard
wise (CCW) to move down through the list. When
console surface settings. To add lockout informa-
the desired session is shown in the bottom line of
tion, or to rename this file, it must be downloaded
the Session display, press the Take button to load
from the RMXdigital Server to a setup computer
the session.
for editing.
For example, to recall and load the “undefined”
Note: The RMXdigital Server must be connected
session file, which is a session file that ships with
to and configured for a network before the tem-
the RMXdigital:
plate session can be downloaded.
1
Use the Session Selector to find and display
UNDEFINED in the bottom line of the ses-
Downloading Sessions
sion display.
2
Before downloading the new template session
With UNDEFINED shown in the bottom
to the setup computer, create a Session Files folder
line, press the Take button to immediately load
to save files while editing and then uploading back
the session.
to the RMXdigital Server.
To download a session from the RMXdigital
Note: When a session is loaded using the
Take button, any channels currently On are
Server to a setup computer:
not immediately affected by the new session
1 Start FTP Voyager.
information. Instead, those channels’ On but-
2 In the connection window, select the console,
tons flash to indicate changes to that channel
then click Connect.
are pending. When a pending channel is then
If the setup computer has never connected to
turned off, the changes from the new session
the console, click New Site, then enter the
file are loaded and take immediate effect.
console’s name and IP address in the entry
boxes, as shown below:
Creating and Using a Template Session
1 Load the undefined session following the steps
in the preceding section.
2 Assign buses and change any channel buttons
and input sources to the most common settings
for the RMXdigital console.
Note: Session files save all channel button set-
FTP Voyager Connection Dialog Box
tings, but rotary knob and fader settings are
not saved as part of the session file.
Click Connect to connect and display the
3 Press the Save button to save the channel set-
console’s file tree, as shown below:
tings. A new session file, named undefine01, has
been saved to the RMXdigital Server. This file
will become the template session file for this
console.
Note: A new session is automatically given a
name based on the name of the session that
RMXd Server Files using FTP Voyager
was loaded when the Save button was pressed.
4-18
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
play as the Monitor Control panel’s Session Se-
3 Open the Storage Card folder, then the Data
lector is rotated.
folder, then the SesFiles folder. The folder’s con-
Note: Session names can have up to ten al-
tents were shown on page 4-1.
Note: Create a shortcut to go directly to the
phanumeric characters, but cannot use spe-
SesFiles folder in FTPVoyager by clicking Tools,
cial characters (spaces and underlines are
then Folder Shortcuts. Click Add and then type
OK). Upper and lower case letters can be used
the SesFiles path name into the Path entry box:
to name the file, but all file names appear in
Storage Card/Data/SesFiles. Click OK
upper case letters in the session display. The
to close the entry box and click OK to accept
file name must have .ses added to the name
the new shortcut. A green SesFiles folder is now
in order to be recognized as a session file.
shown in the file tree. Clicking once on this
4 Upload the renamed file to the RMXdigital
folder opens the SesFiles folder.
Server following the steps in the next section.
4 Copy the session template file that was just
Uploading Sessions
saved (undefine01.ses) to the Session Files
folder created on the setup computer.
To use an edited session file, it must be uploaded
Editing and Renaming Session Files
plate file (template.ses) that was created can
to the RMXdigital Server’s FTP site.The new temAfter downloading the undefine01.ses file,
be uploaded and then used as the basis for creat-
use Notepad® to open up the session file and add
ing new session files. The template session file must
any channel button lockouts (which prevent one
be uploaded into the SesFiles folder on the RMX-
or more channel buttons from being changed by
digital Server’s FTP site. It must have the file ex-
the operator) and other changes as required. Af-
tension .ses.
ter editing this file, use Save As. . . to give it a new,
To upload the template session file to the RMX-
digital Server:
more descriptive name (e.g., template.ses).
Note: Session files can also be renamed using
1 Open the RMXdigital Server’s FTP site, if it is
standard Windows® functions (e.g., right-click the
not already open, and navigate to the SesFiles
file name and choose Rename) or click, pause, click
folder.
on the name to highlight it. This can be done us-
2 Copy the template.ses file from the local com-
ing Windows® Explorer on the setup computer or
puter to the SesFiles folder on the RMXdigital
while viewing the RMXdigital Server’s FTP site
Server’s FTP site.
3 Dial up and take the TEMPLATE session to
using FTP Voyager.
To edit/rename the new template session file:
load it into the RMXdigital console. Confirm
1 Use Notepad® to open the local copy of
that all of the settings and input sources are set
correctly before using it as a template for creat-
undefine01.ses.
2 Edit the file as required.
ing other sessions.
Note: See Session and Init.mac Files (starting on the next page) for more information
on editing session files.
3 Save the file with a new name, such as
template.ses. This name, minus the .ses
extension, is what appears in the session dis4-19
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
Session and Init.mac Files
Since similar channel ID numbers are likewise
assigned to BMXdigital console components and
A session or init.mac file has these sections:
to the audio and logic I/O connections on the Vis-
• General File Information
taMax frames, when a channel ID is used to iden-
• Channel Source Selector Settings
tify a network signal, the channel ID number must
• Channel Button Settings
be proceeded with Dx, where x is the device num-
• Channel Button Lockouts
ber of the console or frame where that signal re-
• Channel Mapping
sides. Here’s an example of how channel ID num-
In order to identify specific channels or signals
bers are used on a networked console:
in the system, two numbering systems are used:
[Router_81]
Include_1=D1,65-96
Include_2=D2,337-352
channel IDs and signal IDs.
In the section of the daypart_0.ses file shown
CHANNEL ID NUMBERS
above, the two Include lines set the available
RMXdigital components (channel strips, moni-
sources shown on the source selector for Router
tor control sections, audio inputs, audio outputs,
81 (e.g., Telco 1). Include_1=D1, sets the sources
and logic I/O ports) are assigned unique ID num-
on device 1 that can be selected (which in the ex-
bers, based upon their position in the mainframe
ample are the 32 inputs on the I/O card in slot 1
or by the card or panel that they reside on, to spe-
of a VistaMax frame, set as device 1).
cifically identify local signals.
Include_2=D2, sets the sources that can be
The Universal Dual Fader channel strips are
selected from device 2, which in this case is the
numbered from the left end of the frame (number
RMXdigital console. 337-352 are the analog and
01) to the right. The maximum number of Univer-
digital inputs on the KSU card.
sal channel strip numbers is 32 because there are
GLOBAL SIGNAL ID NUMBERS
also four“phantom” channels available on the KSU
Each signal in a VistaMax system can be
(28 channel strips could be installed on the
uniquely identified through using the Dx (device
RMXd-28, plus the four phantom channels).
The channel strips set as Telcos are numbered
number) plus the local channel ID number. This
separately from their sequential channel strip num-
makes things easy for the end user since every sig-
ber. The six Telco channels are assigned channel
nal (like the PGM 1 bus signal which is 225 on
ID numbers 81 to 86. See page 2-3 for informa-
every console) just needs the device number fol-
tion on setting a Universal Dual Fader channel as
lowed by the local number. To the system, how-
a Telco channel.
ever, the fastest method is to use global ID num-
ID Numbers
bers, a unique number assigned to each possible
signal in a VistaMax system.
Type
Channel # Assignment Method
Universal channels 1 to 32*
CAT-5 cables, left to right
Monitor Control
33 to 35
Next to last CAT-5 cable
Effects panel (future) 47
Last CAT-5 cable
Audio Inputs/Outputs 37, 39, 41, 43 8-Input Exp cards and KSU
Logic Inputs/Outputs 38, 40, 42, 44 8-Input Exp cards and KSU
Telco Channels
81 to 86
As set by their rotary switches
* there can be a maximum of 28 channel strips installed plus the
four phantom channels, which are numbered 29, 30, 31 and 32
In effect, these Global ID numbers precisely
identify the origination or destination of each signal since included the number also indicates the
console’s or frame’s device number by the Global
number. Thus every audio and logic signal on every KSU card and every 8-Input Expansion card,
as well as every console bus signal (which includes
4-20
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
BUTTON SETTING SECTIONS
each routed channel strip signal and the four
‘phantom’ channels available in the KSU) has a
Every channel strip button has their own sec-
unique Global ID number.
tion in the session file where the button state for
As an example, the Global IDs for sources and
each channel strip can be preset when the session
destinations, on an RMXdigital console set as de-
file loads. The default settings in the
vice 1, are numbered from 65665 (for audio In-
undefined.ses file for all buttons is =0, which
put 1 left, on the left-hand 8-Input expansion card
sets the button state as Off. Settings that require
in a RMX-28 frame) to 65904 (RMXdigital Pro-
other types of entries are typically also undefined.
ducer Mic input). The same signals, on an RMX-
Although the on/off settings could be manually
digital console set as device 2, have Global ID
edited—by changing each =0 setting to =1, it’s
numbers from 131201 up to 131440, while the
generally far easier to simply set the buttons to
signals on device 63 (the highest device number)
their desired states (on or off) on the control pan-
are assigned Global ID numbers from 4128897
els and then use the Monitor Control panel Save
to 4129136.
button to save all the button states at one time
These Global ID signal numbers are used by
into a new session file. This session file can then
the system to define “Takes” which route one source
be edited for use as a template for creating session
to one destination.
files for daily use.
A Global ID Number Calculator is included on
However, there are a few button entries that have
the 99-5000 CD-ROM and they are also available
to be manually edited as they do not have control
from the Harris FTP site (see page 5-1 for ac-
surface buttons. These include the sections [ON],
cess) in the customer_support/rmxdigital folder.
[TelcoRecord], and [TelcoMonitor]. These
The calculator is an Excel file that lists Global ID
are covered separately in the sections that follow.
numbers by entering the console’s device number.
[On]
INFORMATION SECTION
Normally, there are no entries listed in this sec-
The information section begins with the header
tion since this section affects what happens when
[Information]. This section has a channel ID
a session file loads. With no entries, all channels
number chart along with a brief default descrip-
that are Off immediately load the settings from
tion of the file. The description must be manually
the new session file. All channels that are On go
edited to describe how or why the session file was
into pending and do not load their new settings
created (e.g., sets the console to prere-
until the channel is manually turned Off.
However, entries in this section override this
cord network feeds).
To change the file description, scroll down to
default method of changing sessions—forcing
the line that begins with Description=. Edit
channels On or Off automatically when the ses-
the existing description. If required, additional
sion is taken.
For instance, if the On section looks like this,
notes can be placed anywhere in the session file
following a ; (semicolon). Any text proceeded by
[On]
Channel_1=1
Channel_2=0
a ; are comments used to clarify the session file.
when the session file is taken, channel 1 is immediately turned On with the new session settings,
4-21
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
• [TelcoAuto] Sets whether the Auto
Foldback feature is on or off for each Telco
while channel 2 is immediately turned Off—even
if the channel is on-air.
channel.
Typically, there are no entries under the [On]
• [TelcoRecord] Sets whether the Telco
heading unless the console is being setup for non-
channel feeds the Telco Record bus.
attended operation (e.g. slaved to a digital deliv-
• [TelcoMonitor] Sets whether the Telco
ery system).
channel feeds the Telco Monitor bus.
• [Mode] Sets the channel’s default mode.
[TelcoRecord] and [TelcoMonitor]
This section has four values: Stereo (=0),
Each Telco channel can be assigned to the Telco
Left only (=1), Right only (=2), or Mono
Monitor bus and/or to the Telco Record bus un-
Sum (=3).
der these two sections. To assign the Telco chan-
• [local_cough] Sets whether the On but-
nel, the default setting (=0) is changed to =1. This
ton functions as a cough button when the
sets that Telco channel as active on that bus as in:
channel source is a mic and it is On. Press-
[TelcoRecord]
Channel_81=1
Channel_82=0
Channel_83=0
Channel_84=0
ing and holding the On button removes the
mic’s audio from all assigned buses.
• [timer_reset] Sets the channel to reset the event timer, when the timer’s Auto
This sets Telco channel 1 (ID # 81) as feeding
button is lit, when the channel is turned
the Telco Record output, while the other Telco
On. If Auto is not lit, or if the entry is =0,
channels do not feed the Telco Record output.
then there is no timer reset at channel on.
• [fader_start] Sets the channel to au-
SESSION FILE SECTION SUMMARY
tomatically turn on when the fader is moved
Within each of these sections, each channel but-
up from full off and to turn off when moved
ton can be set either On (=1) or Off (=0) when the
back to full off. =0 means fader movement
session file loads:
does not affect on/off status.
• [port_event_card_x] Commands a
• [Cue] Sets whether cue is on or off for
logic output for any Assignable logic con-
each channel.
nector on the KSU (card_4) and the three
• [Send_1] Sets whether the channel is as-
possible 8-Input Expansion cards (card_1,
signed to the send bus.
card_2, card_3).
• [Prog_1, Prog_2, Prog_3, Prog_4]
Sets whether the channel is assigned to any
There could be up to sixteen line entries
under the heading: port_event_j=k to
of the Program buses.
define each port. j is the port number (from
• [Offline_1] Sets whether the channel
1 to 16) with the event function k (0 is a
is assigned to the Offline bus.
null event and 1 is a trigger).
• [Send_1_PF] Sets whether the channel’s
send feed is pre-fader or post-fader (default).
CHANNEL LOCKOUT SECTION
• [Send_1_PS] Sets whether the channel’s
send is pre-switch or post-switch (default).
This section sets whether any channel buttons
• [PanBalance] Sets whether the channel’s
pan/balance control is on or off.
are locked out, preventing changes to the session
file settings by the board operator. Channel lock4-22
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
outs are typically set for unattended console op-
The table entries are in hex, with Map_0 being
eration or when a special console setup must be
a reserved position listed as 00 for no channel de-
maintained.
tected. Map_1 up to Map_28 identify whether a
The channel lockout template section begins
channel strip is installed. Channel strips are num-
with [ChannelLockout_0].
bered sequentially from 01 to 2c. Channel strips
set as Telco channels are numbered 41 to 46.
Setting Channel Lockouts
1
Map_29 up to Map_32 identify the four phantom channels in the KSU card.
Copy the entire channel lockout section of the
session file. It begins with ChannelLockout_0
Map_33 to Map_35 identify the Monitor Con-
and ends with PanBalance=0.
2
trol panel sections as b1 to b3. Map_36 will al-
Paste the copied channel lockout section back
ways be ff for no channel detected.
into the session file. Although it can be pasted
3
anywhere in the file, it is recommended that all
Map_37 and Map_38 identify the KSU card
of the channel lockout sections be kept together
audio and logic. Map_39 through Map_44 iden-
in one area of the session file.
tify the optional 8-Input Expansion cards. The
entries in these sections are 81 to 84 for the logic
Replace the 0 in the pasted section’s heading
section and 91 to 94 for the audio sections.
(ChannelLockout_0) with the channel num-
Map_47 identifies the optional Effects card as
ber that needs the lockout information. Refer
ff when no card is detected.
to the Channel ID Number table on page 4-20
The channel map ends with DSP=x. The num-
for which number to use for each channel.
For example, to add lockout information for
ber listed is one more than the physical number
the left most Universal Dual Fader channel,
of DSP cards installed since the KSU has DSP.
change the header Channel Lockout_0 to
Thus, an RMXd-4 will show DSP=1 even though
ChannelLockout_1. To add button lockout
no separate DSP card is installed.
information for the Telco 2 channel, change
ROUTER ASSIGNMENT SECTIONS
Channel Lockout_0 to Channel Lock-
Each console is assigned a unique device num-
out_82.
4
5
Edit the channel lockout section as needed.
ber by the nqx.ini file during start-up. Though
Each button is locked separately. To allow the
typically left at device=1 for non-networked con-
button to be changed by the operator, leave the
soles, when multiple RMXdigital consoles and
setting for the button as 0. To lockout that par-
VistaMax frames are networked together, each
ticular button, change the setting to 1.
must have a unique device number assigned (from
Repeat steps 1 - 4 for each channel that re-
1 to 63) to distinctly identify its signals to the other
quires any buttons to be locked out.
networked devices. The device number is used to
create the Global Signal ID number that uniquely
MAPPING SECTION
identifies every signal in a networked system.
The mapping section [Mapping] lists the
RouterCommand
RMXdigital channels, as detected at the time the
session was saved, in a table. The section is auto-
The Global signal ID numbers are predomi-
matically rewritten by the RMXdigital Server at
nantly used in the ‘Take commands’ section of the
each save so it should not be edited.
session file or init.mac file to identify sources
4-23
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
Include Lists
and destinations. The section header [Router
Command_1], is used in the init.mac file to set
A source can only be routed or selected on a
up the default routing for the audio and assign-
channel strip source selector if it’s a source listed
able logic connections on the KSU and 8-Input
on the console’s Source Include List, which is
Expansion cards by ‘taking’ or routing each source
stored in the console’s routers.ini file. The
to a DSP destination.
Source Include list (its header is [srcinclude],
A typical [Router Command_1] section on a
is created and maintained using VMCC. It must
RMXd-4 is shown below:
[RouterCommand_1]
take_1=65873,65745
take_2=65875,65747
take_3=65877,65749
take_4=65879,65751
take_5=65881,65753
take_6=65883,65755
take_7=65885,65757
take_8=65887,65759
list every signal that may be required to be routed
on a console.
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
KSU
KSU
KSU
KSU
KSU
KSU
KSU
KSU
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
ALG
ALG
ALG
ALG
DIG
DIG
DIG
DIG
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
KSU channel 1
KSU channel 2
KSU channel 3
KSU channel 4
phantom fader
phantom fader
phantom fader
phantom fader
Since this list could include every signal from
every device in the VistaMax community, the in29
30
31
32
clude list could have several hundred sources. This
would make finding the desired source very difficult for the board operator.
Each Take command (take_x=source,
To limit the total number of sources shown on a
destination) must be listed in numerical or-
channel’s source selector, each channel can have a
der and be on separate lines. Signals can be iden-
channel-specific source list assigned by the ses-
tified by their Global signal IDs, as shown above.
sion file. It should include only those sources re-
65873 identifies the signal as the KSU card A
quired for a particular daypart or application. In
analog left channel in the console assigned as de-
most applications, some channels will keep all
vice number 1. The 65745 identifies that it goes
sources available while others will have specific
to “input 1” of the DSP in the KSU card.
subsets with only the required signals listed.
Up to sixty-four of these Take commands can
It should be noted that once a channel has been
be listed in numeric order in any one session file
assigned a channel-specific include list, that list
to route sources to destinations. This routing oc-
will be used for subsequent sessions, unless a dif-
curs when the session file is loaded (unless a chan-
ferent channel-specific include list is specified for
nel strip is On, in which case it is pending until
that channel. To return the list to the master in-
the channel is turned off).
clude list, the channel-specific include list would
Routes assigned by a session file are continu-
have this command: include_1=all.
ously maintained until another session file is
The following is an example of the channel-
loaded that changes the routing or until a new
specific include lists for four channels set as Telcos.
source is selected on a channel strip, by using a
In this example Telco 1 (channel ID 81) and Telco
FTP command or by using an Edge Device. All
2 (channel ID 82) are active, while the Telco 3
routes are held, even if the console is turned off or
(channel ID 83) and 4 (channel ID 84) entries are
loses power, by a “persistence file” that gets up-
file placeholders since they are not assigned:
dated after every route is taken.
[Router_81]
Include_1=D1,65-96,161-192
Include_2=D2,257-272,337-352,
Take=65873
In previous examples, one source has been
shown being routed to one destination, but any
[Router_82]
Include_1=D1,65,67,69,71,73
Include_2=D2,257-272
Take=macro_2
one source can be routed to any number of destinations by adding separate Take command lines
from that source to the other destinations.
4-24
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
[Router_83]
Take=0
• [room_code_mute] Assigns a room code
for the three console destinations: control
[Router_84]
Take=0
room, studio 1 and external. There is also a
definition for Studio 2, but that is not used
The Take= line sets the source for the channel
by RMXdigital.
strip when the session file loads, with Take=0 or
• [room_code_card_x] Assigns a room
Take=-1 routing silence.The Take command can
code to a console input. This identifies mic
also call a macro file, as shown in Router_82. A
inputs by their room location. The code is
macro is a mini-session file, with a .mac suffix,
used to control which monitor output
that is called from within a session file of via FTP
mutes, and which warning command or
commands. In this case, the file macro_2.mac is
tally is output, when the channel an input
called up in order to set up a special mix-minus
is assigned to is turned On.
feed for Telco 2.
• [system_properties] This section sets
The include statements (Include_x=Dy,
various global properties for the console.
channel number range) set a range of sources,
When the entries are set to =1: the meters
or individual sources separated by commas, that
display average signals only; the cue is can-
can be selected by the channel strip listed in the
celled with channel On; the cue button
section heading (e.g.,[Router_81]). Each include
LEDs blink when active; and the offline sig-
line must be listed in numeric order, where x equals
nal source is post-fader.
1 in the first line, then 2, 3, and so on. Typically,
[system_properties] ;0=not selected
meter_average_only=0
cue/solo_cancel_w_ON=0
cue_lamp_blink=0
offline_sig_post=0
all the sources for one device are listed on a single
line, but they could be divided into separate entry
lines to make it more legible for someone editing
the session file contents.
• [monitor_properties] This section
The y entry (as in =D1) is the device number. In
sets various CR monitor settings. The last
the example, there are two devices in the system
entry, real_air_src_=225 defines the
that the Telco 1 and Telco 2 channels can select
real air input signal (the default setting is
sources from: D1 (device 1) and D2 (device 2).
the PGM 1 bus, signal 225). The other set-
Channel ID numbers identify the available
tings, when set to =1 have these properties:
sources just like they identify the section head-
when cue is active it goes to one side of the
ings. A table listing of the Channel Number As-
CR HP output and monitor goes to the
signments is on page 4-20.
other side; talkback also feeds the cue bus,
CR monitors dim when talkback is received,
INIT.MAC SECTIONS
and the synthetic air function is active.
The init.mac file sets up the console for daily
[monitor_properties]
cue_hp_is_split=1
tkbk_to_cue=1
dim_on_tkbk=1
synth_air_enable=0
Real_Air_Src=225
use. Any init.mac section listed here could be
inserted into a session file and manually changed
to override the default console settings for a particular daypart or application.
• [monitor_selection] This section de-
The init.mac file is maintained and edited
fines the monitor include list for the moni-
using VMCC, so none of these entries are manu-
tor source selector (which can include up
ally edited in the init.mac file:
4-25
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
to 15 sources), and defines the sources for
in order. This gets automatically assigned
the seven monitor select buttons.
by the VMCC as the ports are defined.
• [port_config_card_x] This section
[monitor_selection]
Include_1=D9.337-351,173,175
definekey_1=10
definekey_2=5
definekey_3=0
definekey_4=1
definekey_5=2
definekey_6=3
definekey_7=4
defines logic outputs (those not defined in
the [on_out_port_card_x] section) for
use as directly addressed outputs. One of
four logic commands can be assigned to
each output, but only two: 1, which defines
• [meter_selection] This section has the
the output as closed or 2, which defines it
include list and the seven button definitions
as an open command, are very useful.
for the auxiliary meter buttons. The entries
There could be up to sixteen line entries
are like those in the [ m o n i t o r _
(for an 8-Input Expansion card) under this
selection] section above.
heading. The entries port_config_h=i
• [studio1_selection] This section has
define each port.
the include list and the seven button defi-
h is the port number (from 1 to 16) which
nitions for the studio monitor buttons. The
is set for one of the four types of logic func-
entries are like those in the [monitor_
tions.
selection] section above.
i is the logic function: 0 is a pulsed close
• [on_out_port_card_x] This section
command, 1 is a sustained close, 2 is a sus-
sets the relationship of the output logic for
tained open, and 3 is a pulsed open com-
each Assignable logic connector on the KSU
mand.
(card_4) and the three possible 8-Input
• [on_out_ts_card_x] This section sets
Expansion cards (card_1 , card_2,
the binding of the logic inputs on the As-
card_3) and the timeslots the logic sig-
signable logic connectors on the KSU
nals will use.
(card_4) and the three possible 8-Input
There can be up to sixteen line entries:
Expansion cards (card_1 , card_2,
on_out_port_a=b,c that define the two
card_3). There can be up to sixteen line
logic outputs (called ports) on pin 5 and
entries under this heading. The entries:
pin 11 of each Assignable Logic connector.
on_out_ts_d_i=e,f,g define each port.
a is the port number. It will be 1 to 6 on
d is the port number (from 1 to 16), and
the KSU (to define the outputs on the B, C
i is a sequential entry number starting with
and D connectors) and from 1 to 16 on each
1. The port used as the input is set by e
8-Input Expansion card (to define the two
(from 1 to 32). The logic function is defined
outputs on each logic connector).
by f (a logic binding bit between 1 and 255)
b defines the logic action. It can be 121
and it is assigned to the input timeslot g
(for an On Tally output), 122 (for an Off
(from 1 to 16).
Tally output), 123 (for a start pulse) or 124
Refer to Appendix A for additional command
(for stop pulse).
entry information for session and macro files.
c defines which timeslots are used by
the logic commands.Typically the odd numbered timeslots, starting with slot 1, are used
4-26
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
Software Updates
To update the RMXdigital software:
1 Configure the TFTP Server to point to the folder
Harris Corporation may periodically issue soft-
on the CD-ROM that contains the updated sys-
ware revisions for the RMXdigital Server at no
tem software following the instructions in the
charge. New feature enhancements may also be
previous procedure.
offered at a nominal fee. In either case, updating
2 Make sure the TFTP Server computer is prop-
the operating system software on the RMXdigital
erly communicating with the RMXdigital
Server is quick and easy since a TFTP Server pro-
Server.
gram is included with each software release. It is
3 Turn off the RMXdigital console power supply.
also available from the 99-5000 CD-ROM and
Wait at least 10 seconds, then turn it back on.
from the Harris FTP site: ftp://ftp.pre.com.
The TFTP Server will automatically begin to
See page 5-1 Service for access information.
download and update the RMXdigital Server
software after the SBC boots up (this typically
TFTP SERVER
takes between 30 and 60 seconds).
TFTP stands for Trivial File Transfer Protocol.
4 Once the update has finished loading, quit the
TFTP Servers transfer and update software for
TFTP Server.
routers, switchers, hubs and other networked de-
5 To use the new software, power cycle the RMX-
vices like the RMXdigital Server.
digital console. Again, wait at least 10 seconds
The following steps describe how to install and
before turning it back on.
configure the 3CDaemon TFTP Server—which is
included on the CD-ROM along with the new files,
Settings Recovery
although any TFTP Server can be used to update
the RMXdigital Server software.
A quick method to try to recover a forgotten or
To install and configure the TFTP Server:
inadvertently changed IP address is to use Com-
1 Install the TFTP Server on the setup computer
munity Monitor’s Status display. It shows every
following the instructions included with the soft-
VistaMax device connected to the VistaMax LAN,
ware update.
even those devices that have an IP address out-
2 From the TFTP Server’s File menu, choose Con-
side of the system’s subnet mask, so the unknown
figure Selected Service.
IP address can easily be noted.
3 On the TFTP Upload/Download Directory tab,
Once the IP address is noted, the setup
select the folder on the CD-ROM that contains
computer’s fixed IP address can be reassigned to
the new RMXdigital files.
fall into the subnet mask of that console’s IP so
4 Click OK.
the nqx.ini file can be edited, which is covered
later in this section.
UPDATING THE SOFTWARE
If a username or password was assigned to an
Once the TFTP Server is installed on the setup
RMXdigital Server to limit FTP access, and then
computer, and configured to point to the folder
it was forgotten, to recover it requires connecting
holding the new system software, the update is
a null modem cable between the KSU card’s Test
performed automatically after the RMXdigital con-
Interface connector and Com Port 1 on a Win-
sole is power cycled. The RMXdigital must be
dows® computer running HyperTerminal. This
taken off-air during this procedure.
requires the console to be power cycled, so the
4-27
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
4 RMXdigital Server
console must be taken offline before following this
procedure:
1 Connect a DB-9 female-to-female null modem
cable from the KSU card’s Test Interface connector to the Com 1 serial port on the setup
DB-9 female to female null modem cable
(available from Cables N Mor,
http://www.cablesnmor.com/null-modem-cable.html)
computer.
2 Start HyperTerminal (a standard Windows®
Communications Accessories program) and establish a new connection using the Port Settings shown adjacent.
3 Power cycle the RMXdigital console. As the
RMXdigital Server starts up, HyperTerminal
will show multiple screens of information. Look
for the USER= entry a shown below:
USER = username,password
Use the HyperTerminal scroll feature to
redisplay this information as required to see
what the username and password are.
4 Run FTP Voyager on the setup computer and
HyperTerminal Port Settings for communicating
with the RMXdigital Server
enter the username and password as required
to view the Storage Card folder contents.
4-28
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
5
Service
T
pedite the ordering process and to ensure the correct parts are ordered, have the Harris part num-
he RMXdigital console is designed to give
bers available when ordering. For a list of parts,
see page 5-2. Panels, cards and assemblies may
many years of trouble-free operation. If it does re-
have lead times exceeding two weeks, so order
accordingly.
quire service, please read through this section. It
Panels, cards and assemblies returned to Harris for service, exchange or credit must have an
provides information on servicing the RMXdigital
RA (Return Authorization) tracking number. This
number is assigned by the Technical Services De-
console, including information on the spare and
partment. Items received without an RA number
written on the shipping label side of the packag-
replacement parts that are available.
ing may be refused or subject to additional handling fees.
Parts and Repair Services
To order assemblies or to request an RA contact Harris by mail, phone, fax, e-mail, or visit the
Harris Website:
There are only a few parts that are field replaceable on the RMXdigital (see page 5-2 for part num-
Harris Corporation
Attention: Technical Services Department
4240 Irwin Simpson Road
Mason, OH 45040 USA
ber listing). Assemblies are field replaceable, but
are generally not field-serviceable. For servicing,
assemblies should be returned to Harris Techni-
Phone: 513.459.3503, 8:00 to 5:00 EST
Fax: 513.701.5450
E-mail: [email protected]
cal Services Department.
RMXdigital technical information (this manual,
www.broadcast.harris.com
selected schematics, software, PROM revision in-
All U.S. orders and serviced assemblies are
formation, etc.) are available at this Internet sup-
shipped FOB Mason, Ohio using UPS Groundtrak,
port site: ftp://ftp.pre.com.
Log in (username) as: customer. The pass-
unless otherwise specified. Federal Express or UPS
word is: pacific. All documents and schemat-
two-day, overnight and next morning delivery is
ics are published in PDF format, so Acrobat
available for most items. For next day delivery,
Reader 5.0 or later is required.
orders must be placed before 2 p.m. Eastern Time
and the shipping method must be specified at the
PARTS ORDERING AND REPAIR
INFORMATION
time of order.
Services can be charged to AmEx, VISA or
Spare panels, cards and assemblies can be pur-
Mastercard or can be shipped COD, if not on ac-
chased through a sales representative or through
count with Harris. Contact a sales representative
the Harris Technical Services Department. To ex-
for account information.
5-1
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C.1 • 12/10
I
O
N
5 Service
Harris #
38-88
50-26
76-1403
76-1404
80-1752
80-1846
80-1924
80-1929
80-1961
80-1975-1
90-1858-1
90-1873
90-1713-2
90-1722
90-1872-1
90-1872-2
90-1872-3
90-1872-4
90-1999
99-1411-1
99-1411-2
99-1409
99-1410
99-1714-3
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS
Serviceable Assemblies
These are the serviceable or replaceable panels,
cards, assemblies or PCAs used in the RMXdigital:
Harris #
90-1950
95-1178
95-1179
99-1177
95-2670-1
95-2670-2
95-2679
99-1205
99-1406
99-1407
99-1975-1
90-2129
90-2130
99-2665
95-2665
99-2667
95-2667
99-2672-1
95-2672-1
95-2675
95-2677
99-1800
99-2672-2
95-2672-2
95-2675
95-2677
99-1800
Description or Use
Original Console Display (tall display)
Clock PCA
Event Timer PCA
Bargraph Meter PCA
Left motherboard PCA (for DSP)
Middle motherboard PCA (for DSP)
Right motherboard PCA (for KSU)
48 Volt Power Supply (2 RU)
Monitor Control Panel
Universal Dual Fader Panel
Reflective Console Display (low-profile)
Dual Meter PCA
Clock-Timer PCA
8-Input Expansion Card
8-Input Expansion PCA
DSP Card
DSP PCA
KSU Card (no optical connectors)
KSU, main PCA
KSU, analog connector PCA
KSU, digital connector PCA
Single-board computer PCA
KSU Card (with optical connectors)
KSU, main PCA
KSU, analog connector PCA
KSU, digital connector PCA
Single-board computer PCA
TOOL AND INSTALLATION KITS
A tool kit and an installation kit are shipped
with each new console.
76-1400 Installation Kit
Harris # Description or Use
Qty.
14-482
3-pin AMP MOD IV housing
13
14-484
6-pin AMP MOD IV housing
21
14-490
12-pin AMP MOD IV housing
4
14-492
14-pin AMP MOD IV housing
2
15-938-1 AMP MOD IV contact receptacles
241
38-88
4-40 x 1/4" buttonhead screws
12
76-1403 Lens Kit, Monitor Control panel
1
76-1404 Lens Kit, Universal Dual Fader panels *
80-1961 Insert Sheet, for removable lenses
1
* one per installed panel
Replaceable Parts
These are the field-replaceable parts:
Harris #
12-93
17-122
19-327
19-335
19-336
21-226-6
21-226-7
21-349-1
21-352-1
21-352-2
21-353-1
30-51
23-132
32-725
32-726
32-727
32-728
32-729
32-730
Description or Use
Silver hex panel screw
5 Volt power supply (for Console Display)
Monitor Control panel, removable lens kit
Universal Dual Fader panel, removable lens kit
Lens (covers 10-character display and LEDs)
Card cage slot blank panel
Rear cover, Universal Dual Fader panel
Rear cover, Monitor Control panel
Insert Sheet (for printing removable lens labels)
Reflector (for low-profile display)
15-foot DC cable (power supply to console)
Cue Speaker assy (23-132 speaker and cable)
Fader and cable assy
Battery holder assy (30-51 holder and cable)
RMXd-4 H/P jack assy (17-122 jack and cable)
RMXd-12 H/P jack assy (17-122 jack and cable)
RMXd-20 H/P jack assy (17-122 jack and cable)
RMXd-28 H/P jack assy (17-122 jack and cable)
Cable Harness (for low-profile display)
One slot wide divider kit (to add two turret panels)
Two slots wide divider kit (to add four turret panels)
14.25" blank panel, one slot wide
14.25" blank panel, two slots wide
6" Turret blank panel, one slot wide
Description or Use
10-character display
Headphone jack
Flex cable, 30-conductor (KSU card)
18" Red CAT-5 cable (panel power & comm)
36" Black CAT-5 cable (motherboard jumper)
PROM, Monitor Control panel
PROM, Universal Dual Fader panel
PROM, DSP card
DSP PROM, KSU card (U55)
Net PROM, KSU card (U60)
PROM, 8-Input Expansion card
Battery holder
Cue speaker
Rotary control knob
Fader knob (silver)
Fader knob (red)
Fader knob (green)
Fader knob (blue)
Fader knob (yellow)
76-1401 Tool Kit
Harris #
50-7
70-90
70-126
70-129
Description or Use
AA NiCad batteries
Hex/Allen screwdriver
AMP MOD IV crimp tool
AMP MOD IV pin extractor tool
Qty.
3
1
1
1
76-2665 8-Input Expansion Card Kit
Harris #
14-482
14-484
14-490
15-938-1
38-88
Description or Use
3-pin AMP MOD IV housing
6-pin AMP MOD IV housing
12-pin AMP MOD IV housing
AMP MOD IV contact receptacles
4-40 x 1/4" buttonhead screws
5-2
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C.1 • 12/10
I
O
N
Qty.
8
8
8
144
12
5 Service
Console Troubleshooting
Which control is being shown is identified by the
yellow and red LEDs under each source display.
There are diagnostic test modes built into each
The operation of each button is tested in this mode
Universal Dual Fader panel and the Monitor Con-
by pressing the button. The button LEDs toggle
trol panel. The Control Test Mode allows each but-
on and off with each press each button.
ton, fader and rotary encoder to be tested so correct operation can be verified.
LOGIC STATES TEST MODE
A Logic States Test mode is also built into the
This test mode is entered and exited during nor-
Monitor Control panel to allow the state of the
mal console operation to display the logic states
CR, Studio and External logic functions to be dis-
for the Control Room, Studio and External logic
played. There is a full-size overlay on page 5-4
signals. To enter or exit the test mode, press the
(and a PDF file in the 99-5000 CD-ROM) that
Talk to Studio, Talk to External and Studio Take
can be printed out to go over the monitor selector
buttons together while the Next LED is off.
buttons. Its use is shown below, in the right col-
This mode does not affect source selection but-
umn.
ton operation, so new monitor and meter sources
CONTROL TEST MODE
To enter the Control Test mode on a Universal
Dual Fader panel, remove the panel and unplug
the red CAT-5 cable to remove power. Plug the
cable back in, then press and release either Off
button within three seconds of applying power. To
exit Control Test mode press either channel’s On
and Off buttons together.
To enter Control Test mode on the Monitor panel,
unplug the red CAT-5 cable. Plug the cable back
in, then press and release the Timer Stop and Session Take buttons together within three seconds
of applying power. To exit Control Test mode, press
Logic State Test Mode Overlay
over the Monitor panel buttons
to identify logic activity
the Timer Reset and Start buttons together.
When Control Test mode is active the following
can be selected while in this test mode.
The button LEDs indicate the logic states for
the logic signals shown above. Lit LEDs indicate
Test Mode Displays
true or on conditions, while the unlit LEDs indicate false or off conditions.
is shown in the source name display:
This test mode is useful for verifying that exter-
Move each rotary control and fader and observe
nal devices like mic remote panels, intercom pan-
their encoder pulse output count (in hex), which
els and warning interfaces are properly setup and
is shown in the channel source name display.
properly wired and that they are sending the
5-3
H A R R I S
proper logic to the console.
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
5 Service
Control Panel Servicing
Installing Control Panels
To install a Dual Fader or a Monitor Control
Control panels are a “button sandwich” consist-
panel into the frame:
ing of separate buttons and conductive plastic con-
1 Remove any blank panels covering the slots
tact sheets between a switchboard PCA and a metal
where the control panel is to be installed.
faceplate with plastic inlay. Control panels are not
2 Set the bottom end of the panel on the front
a field-serviceable assembly, but they do have lim-
rail support fingers. Lower the panel toward
ited field-replaceable parts. All replaceable parts
the top rail until the red CAT-5 cable can be
(10-character display and lens, rotary and fader
plugged into the panel’s RJ-45 jack (bottom
knobs, fader, rear cover) are listed on page 5-2.
panel, upper middle section).
3 Lower the panel onto the top rail.
NOTE: Do NOT disassemble the faceplate/
4 Fasten the panel to the frame using the 38-88
switchboard subassembly on the Universal Dual
Fader panel or the Monitor Control panel, as these
silver hex screws removed previously.
are assembled using a fixture.
FADER SERVICING
Universal Dual Fader panels can be removed or
installed, with the console powered and on-air,
There are no replaceable or rebuildable parts
without causing any audio interruption or noises
on the RMXdigital fader assembly. Fader service
in the program audio. The new panel assumes the
is comprised of cleaning and lubricating. Faders
removed panel’s button settings when plugged in,
are conductive plastic, single-element faders.
but all fader and pot levels will change to the new
If the fader movement is rough, either the lubri-
panel’s control settings. It is recommended that
cant on the glide rails has evaporated or foreign
all bus assignments be turned off prior to unplug-
material has gotten into the fader. Dow Corning
ging a Universal Dual Fader panel.
510 is the preferred glide rail lubricant. Other oils
Before removing a powered Monitor Control
or lubricants may cause contamination by migrat-
panel, turn off all speaker power amplifiers.
ing to the contact fingers and damaging the conductive plastic or causing intermittent operation.
REMOVING CONTROL PANELS
Fader Disassembly and Cleaning
To remove a Dual Fader or Monitor Control
panel from the frame:
To disassemble and clean a fader:
1 Use the included hex tool (70-90) to remove
1 Remove the control panel with the problem
the top and bottom silver hex screws (38-88).
fader from the frame.
There are two screws top and bottom on each
2 Remove the rear cover from the control panel
Dual Fader panel. There are three screws top
(four screws per side).
and bottom on the Monitor Control panel.
3 Unplug the problem fader, pull off the fader
2 Carefully lift the panel up from the top edge,
knob, and remove the two fader hex screws
so the red CAT-5 cable can be reached and
(use 70-90 tool) to remove the fader from the
unplugged from the bottom of the panel.
control panel.
4 Remove the snap-on fader cover (held in place
NOTE: If you need to replace one of the assem-
by plastic end tabs).
blies, please contact Harris Technical Services
5 Clean the fader using a dry cotton swab or
Department for service or replacement parts.
one dampened only with distilled water.
5-5
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
5 Service
CLOCK TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE: The use of chemical cleaners on the conductive plastic will substantially shorten fader life.
If the clock’s colons are blinking, it indicates
Never touch the fader slider contact fingers while
the clock is set for slave mode, but the ESE or
cleaning the fader parts.
SMPTE timecode signal is not being received. If
Always use a clean dry swab to dry off the con-
an ESE or SMPTE master clock is not being used,
ductive plastic tracks after cleaning. If the fader
switch the clock-timer board switch DS1-2 and
rails are noticeably dirty, wipe them off using a
DS1-5 to off to set the clock for autonomous mode.
dry cotton swab, then lubricate the glide rail.
See pages 2-6 and 2-7 for information on the clock-
If coffee, a soft drink, or other sugared liquid
timer PCA and DS1 switch settings.
has been spilled into the fader, remove the fader
To use an ESE or a SMPTE master clock, con-
from the panel as soon as possible. Remove the
nect the balanced, or unbalanced, signal to a six-
fader top cover and hold it under hot running wa-
pin AMP MOD IV housing. The signal uses pins 4
ter while moving the fader slider back and forth
(GND), 5 (+) and 6 (-). This connector plugs into
to dislodge any sugars. Thoroughly dry the rails
J4 on the clock-timer PCA. Note the signal polar-
and conductive plastic using dry cotton swabs,
ity, if reversed the clock will not detect the time
taking care not to touch the fader fingers, then
code. Also, make sure the terminals are locked into
lubricate the glide rail.
the housing otherwise intermittent operation could
result.
Lubricating the Glide Rail
EVENT TIMER TROUBLESHOOTING
Move the fader slider to the middle of its travel.
Place one drop of Dow Corning 510 lubricant (or
If the timer is not working properly, check that
equivalent non-migrating lubricant) on the top rail
the interconnecting cable is properly seated at the
to either side of the fader slider bushings. Move
back of the RMXdigital mainframe and at the con-
the slider through its full travel to distribute the
nector on the clock-timer PCA.
lubricant. Be sure to wipe off any excess lubri-
If the tenths of seconds display is not function-
cant. Normally only the top rail (the one on which
ing as expected, check the DIP switch setting on
the fader slider bushings glide) requires lubricant.
the clock-timer circuit board. Additional timer information is on page 2-6.
Console Display Service
If the timer is not auto-resetting as expected,
make sure the Auto button is lit on the Monitor
The meters and clock-event timer PCAs are lo-
Control panel, and that the [timer_reset] section
cated in the Refelctive Console Display. To access
of the session file section is properly configured.
these PCAs, first turn off the console power sup-
Auto Timer Reset Section of Session File
ply, then remove the reflector and lay the display
[timer_reset]
Channel_1=0
Channel_2=0
Channel_3=0
Channel_4=1
Channel_5=1
Channel_6=1
chassis face down onto a protective surface (towel
or other non-scratching surface) to remove the bottom cover. The PCAs are shown as they appear in
the display on page 2-7. This page also has the
setup switch setting information.
5-6
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
In this example, channels 1 - 3
do not reset the timer when
turned on because their entry is
=0.
Channels 4 - 6 do reset the timer
because their entry is =1
5 Service
Any channel that should reset the timer when
48 Volt Power Supply
turned on needs to be set as =1. Those channels
set as =0 do not reset the timer when turned on.
Periodically check that vent openings are not
For more information about session file settings,
blocked and there is no dust buildup on the top
see Chapter 4 RMXdigital Server.
cover openings. The green LED on the power supply front panel indicates its 48 volt output is good.
METER TROUBLESHOOTING
The meter PCA plugs into the clock-timer PCA.
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of
If the meters are not working properly, check that
electric shock, do not disassemble
the DIP switches are set correctly. The settings are
the power supply. Refer servicing
covered on page 2-6 and 2-7.
to qualified service personnel.
POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS
Backup Batteries
See page 2-8 for interconnection details. Only
one connection is required from the supply’s
A “Keep Alive” voltage is generated by three AA
5-pin connector. 90-1858-1 is the interconnection
nickel cadmium (NiCad) batteries supplied in the
cable from the power supply to the console frame.
tool kit.These batteries supply voltage to hold each
90-1858-1 Cable Color Code/Pinout
channel strip’s button state and signal selection
during momentary power outages so the console
Supply End
1
2
3
4
5
-
returns to the same state when power is restored.
If the console does not return to its previous
state after being powered down for only a few minutes, then the batteries probably need replacing,
although there could be a problem in the battery
Signal
Wire Color Console End
+48 V
Red
1
+48 V
White
4
Shield
Clear cover
2
+48 V Return Black
6
+48 V Return Green
3
no connection
5
charging circuit or motherboard connection. Check
6 5 4
the charging circuit and motherboard connection
by removing one battery and then measuring the
voltage (should be about +4.5 VDC) on the bat-
1 2 3 4 5
tery terminals while the console is powered.
PIN NUMBERING
WIRE INSERTION VIEW
Although the batteries should last several years
when under continuous trickle-charging, it is recommended that they be replaced yearly. See page
2-9 for replacement information.
5-7
H A R R I S
3 2 1
PIN NUMBERING
WIRE INSERTION VIEW
C O R P O R A T
Revision C.1 • 12/10
I
O
N
5 Service
Frame Component Info
the Monitor Control panel. The remaining red
CAT-5 cables in the frame plug into Universal Dual
The +48 volts from the main and redundant
Fader panels.
power supplies connect on J18 and J19 on the
The red CAT-5 cables for the Dual Fader panels
KSU motherboard. The motherboards and their
are oriented from the left end of the console frame,
connections are detailed on page 5-10. The +48
with the farthest left cable designated for channel
volts from each connector is coupled through dual
strips 1 and 2 (it plugs into the first Universal
Schottky diode CR1, which is mounted on the right
Dual Fader panel). The next cable is for channel
end of the KSU motherboard. Its output is the
strips 3 and 4 (the next Dual Fader panel), and so
+48 volt source for the console.
on, up to the two used for the Monitor Control
The +48 volts is routed to each control panel
and optional panel.
on pin 6 of the RJ-45 connectors with red CAT-5
Red CAT-5 cables are 18" long which allows
cables (J13 - J16 on the KSU MB and J1 - J4 on
any panel to be moved a few slots left or right of
the DSP MBs). Pin 3 has the 48 volt return.
its standard position to allow installation of a blank
Each red CAT-5 is routed through a round ac-
panel or a Divider Kit (used to add Harris turret
cess hole up to the control panel section of the
control panels into the frame).
frame (see below).There are four red CAT-5 cables
Each DSP card routes signals for eight chan-
in the RMXd-4 frame, eight in the RMD-12, twelve
nels with the control signals from four Universal
in the RMXd-20 and sixteen in the RMXd-28.
Dual Fader panels (two channels strips per panel).
The last red CAT-5 cable (closest to the right
The last four channels (two Universal panels) are
end of the frame) is available for an optional ef-
routed by the KSU card’s DSP. The KSU DSP also
fects panel. The next red CAT-5 cable plugs into
handles summing buses and monitoring. In addi-
RMXdigital-12, Frame Components
99-2667 DSP Card
99-2665 8-Input Expansion Card (optional)
80-1846 Blank panel
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
CAT-5 for
Monitor
Control
panel
CAT-5 for
future
FX panel
99-1409 Blank Panel
Input Slot 12
Input Slot 10
Input Slot 9
Input Slot 8
5-8
CAT-5 for
Channels
11 and 12
99-1406 Monitor
Control panel
CAT-5 for
Channels
9 and 10
CAT-5 for
Channels
7 and 8
Input Slot 7
Input Slot 5
Input Slot 4
Input Slot 6
CAT-5 for
Channels
5 and 6
CAT-5 for
Channels
3 and 4
Input Slot 3
Input Slot 1
Input Slot 2
CAT-5 for
Channels
1 and 2
Threaded inserts
for adding a Divider
Panel Kit to any slot
99-2672-1 or 99-2672-2 KSU Card
Input Slot 11
19-335 Red
Cat-5 Cables (x8)
for 99-1407 Universal
Dual Fader Input panels
5 Service
tion, the KSU is the network interface for the Vis-
can be made or sessions taken or saved.
taMax system for both communications and for
Pressing the other reset switch (System) causes
the VistaMax Link I/O.
audio signal interruption by resetting the console.
It is equivalent to power cycling the console by
turning off the power supply.
The Test Interface connector can connect the
console to the serial port on the setup computer.
Use HyperTerminal to view serial communications
from the console during start-up. This includes
KSU Card Service Info
such data as the IP address and network name
for the console (see page 4-27 for added details
on using the serial port)
There are four yellow LEDs near the right end
NOTE: This card cannot be plugged in, or un-
of the card that indicate operational status:
plugged, while the console is powered up.
• Active LED. On solid indicates normal operation. It is off when the system is starting or if a
card problem is encountered.
• Control Comm LED. Flashes to indicate
DSP Card Service Info
Ethernet communications.
• DSP LED. Blinks with a “heartbeat rhythm”
to indicate the DSP is active. On the RMXd-4, the
There are two yellow LEDs near the right end
LED flashes twice as fast as on other frame sizes
of the card that indicate operational status:
to indicate the KSU is the master DSP. On larger
• DSP LED. Blinks with a “heartbeat rhythm”
frame sizes the leftmost DSP card’s LED will flash
to indicate the DSP is active. The leftmost DSP
twice as fast as this LED to indicate the master.
card’s LED will flash twice as fast as the LEDs on
• Net Activity LED. Flashes to indicateVistaMax
the other DSP cards and the KSU to indicate it is
network activity.
the master DSP card.
The Active LED on the Ethernet connector lights
• Automation LED. Flashes to indicateVistaMax
up to indicate a good connection when a CAT-5
network activity.
cable is connected to an active port on a computer
NOTE: This card cannot be plugged in, or un-
or a network hub or switch.
plugged, while the console is powered up.
The green LED on the optical Facet connection
or both the yellow and green LEDs on the copper
connection must be on solid to indicate a good
connection to a VistaMax Hub card.
8-In Exp Card Service Info
Two reset switches are on the left end of the
panel. Pressing the SBC reset switch resets the
Single Board Computer on the KSU card, which
There are three LEDs near the right end of the
does not affect console settings and signals. It only
card that indicate operational status:
causes the SBC to reestablish its Ethernet connec-
• Inactive LED (red). This LED is off during
tion with the network, which typically requires one
normal operation. It is on when the system is start-
to two minutes. During this time no new routes
ing up or if a card problem is encountered.
5-9
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
5 Service
tration below. The motherboards can be accessed
• Ctrl Com LED (yellow). Flashes to indicate
from the front side of the card cage by removing a
system communications.
• Normal/Data LED (green). On solid when the
cover panel (two panels on the RMXd-28). The
card is operating with no active audio or logic con-
panel hooks at the top and is fastened along the
nections. Flashes to indicate audio or logic net-
bottom using Phillips screws.
The DSP and 8-Input Expansion card signals
work activity.
NOTE: This card can be plugged in or unplugged
connect to the KSU card using black CAT-5 cables
while the console is powered up, but any signals
to tie the DSP motherboards to the KSU mother-
connected to this card will be affected.
board. One is connected per DSP (DSP Cable) with
a second one (I/O Cable) installed for the optional
Motherboard Service Info
8-Input Expansion cards.
Red CAT-5 cables carry +48 volts and data
There are three types of motherboards—two
to/from the Universal Dual Fader panels, the Moni-
DSP and one KSU as shown below, used in the
tor Control panel and the FX panel. See page 5-8
RMXdigital. They plug directly into one another
for their frame orientations.
and fasten to the bottom of the card cage. Which
card types are installed depend upon frame size,
as shown in the Motherboard Orientation illus-
RMXDIGITAL MOTHERBOARDS
RMXD-20 Motherboard Configuration
To
Console
Display
KSU Card
To
Studio
Selector
Panel
From
Power
Supplies
DSP Card 1
DSP Card 2
95-2670-1, Left Motherboard PCA
To Four Universal Dual
Fader Input Panels
(red CAT-5 cables)
95-2670-2, Middle Motherboard PCA
From KSU Card
(black CAT-5)
To Four Universal Dual
Fader Input Panels
(red CAT-5 cables)
DSP Card Connections
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
95-2679, KSU Motherboard PCA
DSP jacks
J5
(black
CAT-5)
From KSU Card
(black CAT-5)
I/O jacks
To Two
To Monitor
J6
Universal Control Panel
(black
Dual Fader (red CAT-5)
CAT-5) input Panels
(red CAT-5)
KSU Card Connections
To Universal Dual Fader panel 1
To Universal Dual Fader panel 2
To Universal Dual Fader panel 3
To Universal Dual Fader panel 4
From KSU (DSP cable)
From KSU (I/O cable)
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
J10
Console Display (Meters/Timer)
Auxiliary +48 VDC
C/R Headphones
Cue Speaker
Battery Holder
Meter Signal Names
To DSP 1
To DSP 2
To DSP 3
To I/O 1
J11
J12
J13
J14
J15
J16
J17
J18
J19
To I/O 2
To I/O 3
To Universal Dual Fader panel 1
To Universal Dual Fader panel 2
To FX Panel
To Monitor Control Panel
To Studio Selector Panel
From 48 Volt Supply (primary)
From 48 Volt Supply (redundant)
Motherboard Orientation and Cabling, by Frame Size
95-2670-1
DSP 1
95-2679
RMXd-4 (four red CAT-5, zero black CAT-5)
95-2670-1
95-2679
RMXd-12 (eight red CAT-5, two black CAT-5)
95-2670-1
95-2670-2
95-2679
RMXd-20 (twelve red CAT-5, four black CAT-5)
95-2670-2
95-2670-2
95-2679
RMXd-28 (sixteen red CAT-5, six black CAT-5)
DSP 2
DSP 3
KSU
5-10
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
To FX
Panel
(red
CAT-5)
6
Accessories
H
Accessory Panels
arris offers a number of accessories and
Turret accessory panels maintain the console’s
look and feel while providing remote control for
services to complement your RMXdigital console.
important studio functions. RMXdigital accessory
panels are 6" long and either 1.6" or 3.2" wide.
Available products range from the VistaMax Audio
Single width panels (1.6" x 6" panels) include
various mic control panels, studio and headphone
Management System (to integrate multiple RMX-
level panels, and peripheral control panels.
There are two types of cabinet skirt-mounted
digital and BMXdigital consoles into a facility-wide
headphone panels (jack-only and jack with rotary
level control). Custom-designed switch and indi-
network), to host and guest mic control panels and
cator panels are also available.
The 99-1788-1 Single Cabinet Plate allows any
headphone panels, peripheral control panels, a host
single 1.6" x 6" panel to mount into a countertop.
The 99-1788-2 Dual Cabinet Plate allows two 1.6"
turret with clock and timer and space for eight tur-
panels or a 3.2" double-width panel to mount into
a countertop (shown below).
ret panels, and a 3 x 6 headphone distribution amp
To install more than one or two Accessory panels in a studio use the 99-1213 Host Turret. It has
with digital level control panels. Harris services
eight 1.6" turret panel slots and an integral Clock
and Event Timer, as shown on page 6-2.
range from supplying logic wiring for common
CABINET PLATE APPLICATION EXAMPLES
peripheral devices to complete system wiring design and installation packages.
Furniture and Cabinetry
Harris offers a full line of standard and custom
furniture and cabinetry specifically designed to
house the RMXdigital console with studio peripheral equipment. Complete turnkey studio design
and implementation services are also available.
99-1788-1 SINGLE
POSITION CABINET PLATE
(SHOWN WITH A 99-1197)
Contact your Harris sales representative for details.
6-1
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
99-1788-2 DUAL
POSITION CABINET PLATE
(SHOWN WITH A 99-1198
& A 99-1191)
6 Accessories
99-1213 STUDIO CONTROL TURRET, APPLICATION EXAMPLE
99-1211 Turret Clock and Event Timer
99-1210
99-1714-3
99-1198
99-1714-3
Group Mic
Control Panel
Blank
Panel
Host, Mic
Control Panel
Blank
Panel
99-1195
99-1190
Digital Delivery
System Panel
MIC REMOTE CONTROL PANELS
Studio Selector Panel
99-1192
Dual Fader
Panel
STUDIO MONITOR SELECTOR &
FADER PANELS
Three mic remote control panels are available
for the RMXdigital. The most basic panel is the
The studio monitor’s source selection can be
99-1197 with On, Off, and Cough buttons (shown
controlled in the studio by using a Studio Monitor
on page 6-1). The 99-1198 (shown in the Host
Selector Panel (99-1190) with the RMXdigital.The
Turret example above) adds a Talkback button to
panel connects to the rear of the RMXdigital using
the three basic panel buttons. A simplified sche-
a straight-thru CAT-5 cable.
matic, and connection information, for these pan-
A Single (99-1191) or a Dual Fader Level Panel
els is shown on page 6-4.
(99-1192) can be plugged into the Studio Monitor
The 99-1210 Group Mic Controller (also shown
Selector for controlling the output level of the
above) is used when separate guest mic control
studio monitors. A Dual Fader is used with a 99-
panels are not installed. The panel gives one host
1214-1 or -2 headphone jack panel to control the
On/Off control for up to six microphones on a
host’s headphone level when using the 99-1215
single 1.6" panel.
headphone amplifier.
6-2
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
6 Accessories
HOST TURRET
Existing headphone control panels, which use
The 99-1213 Host Turret (shown on page 6-2)
a pot to directly control the audio to the head-
includes a 99-1211 Clock and Event Timer. It has
phones, can also be used with the 99-1215 Head-
space for eight 1.6" panels, four 3.2" panels, or a
phone Amplifier.
combination thereof. The Host Turret requires a
countertop cutout of 12.8" x 10".
ESE Cable
Some of the most commonly used Accessory
panels, as shown in the Host Turret example, are
An ESE timecode signal extension cable is in-
the Studio Selector panel (99-1190) that allows
cluded in the original display’s umbilical cable. It
host control over monitor source selection; the
terminates in a 9-pin female D-Sub connector near
Dual Fader panel (99-1192) for host control of
the mainframe connectors. On the reflective dis-
the studio speaker and the host headphone levels;
play the ESE or SMPTE cable termiantes in a
and the Group Mic panel (99-1210) with On/Off
AMP MOD IV connector (J4). Refer to page 2-7
control of up to six microphones. Control panels
for the pinout of this conenctor.
for tape machines, digital delivery systems, and
On an original display, terminate the facility-
delay units are also available.
supplied ESE cable in a male 9-pin D-Sub, using
pins 1 and 3. The clock’s ESE signal input is bal-
RMXDIGITAL DIVIDER KIT
anced, so either a balanced or an unbalanced ESE
Mounting an accessory panel into the RMX-
signal can be used (connect the + signal to pin 1).
digital mainframe requires a 99-1411-1 or a 99-
See the drawing below for details.
1411-2 Divider Kit (see page 2-2 for additional
information) be installed in the mainframe.
The 99-1411-1 kit takes up one input slot and
holds two 1.6" x 6" panels.
The 99-1411-2 takes up two input slots and
END VIEW, MALE D-SUB
(ESE TIMECODE EXTENDER)
holds two 3.2" x 6" panels, four 1.6" x 6" panels,
or a combination thereof.
Headphone Distribution Amp
The 99-1215 Headphone amp has six discrete
Logic Wiring
outputs (for one Host and up to five Co-Hosts and/
or Guests) and three inputs. The amplifier’s in-
To assist in logic cable design and construction,
puts can come from the Control Room and/or Stu-
Harris’ Technical Services Department can
dio Host and Guest headphone outputs.
supply logic wiring diagrams for many popular
Headphone level is digitally controlled when the
peripheral devices.
99-1214-series headphone panels are used. Head-
To assist in installation, Harris also offers pre-
phone panels are available with and without a
made peripheral logic cables for many popular
volume control pot. Those without a pot are de-
devices. For availability and pricing, contact a sales
signed to use the headphone fader panel (shown
representative.
in the dual cabinet plate example on page 6-1).
6-3
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
6 Accessories
MIC REMOTE CONTROL PANEL INFORMATION (FOR 99-1197 AND 99-1198)
AMBER (TALKBACK)
CR3** CR6**
V+ SUPPLY (5 TO 30)
J1
4
ON TALLY
J1
3
RED (ON)
CR8
OFF TALLY
J1
2
LOGIC GROUND
J1
1
TALKBACK **
J5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
AMBER (COUGH)
CR4
CR5
CR7 YELLOW (OFF)
CR1
CR2
J1: TO ASSIGNABLE LOGIC CONNECTOR
R1 *
S1 **
J1
TALK TO C/R **
7
J1
COUGH
6
J1
ON
5
J1
OFF
S2
ON
S4
GNDD
* Resistor Pack R1 limits the LED current. Its value is determined
by the voltage supplied by the console. Panels ship from the
factory with the 5 Volt resistor pack installed.
GNDD
8
COUGH
OFF
S3
Console Resistor
Logic Pack Value Harris P/N
Mic Remote
Control Panel
Schematic
5 Volts 47 ohms
12 Volts 390 ohms
6-786
6-787
Digikey P/N
GNDD
4608X-1-470-ND
4608X-1-391-ND
1 2 3
4 5 6
J2: TO GROUP MIC CONTROLLER
(use cable 99-790-CU)
** These items are not populated
on the 99-1197 Panel.
Application Examples
Mic Remote Control
Panel Connections
CURRENT LIMITING
RESISTOR PACK
(symetrical
orientation)
J2: TO/FROM GROUP
MIC CONTROLLER *
J1: TO/FROM
CONSOLE ASSIGNABLE
LOGIC *
TALK
BACK
* For most
applications only
J1 will be used.
COUGH
6
5
3
2
4
1
J2
COUGH
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
99-1788-1
SINGLE CABINET
PLATE with a
99-1197
GUEST MIC PANEL
(ON/OFF/COUGH)
J1
99-1788-2 DUAL CABINET
PLATE with a 99-1198
GUEST MIC PANEL
(ON/OFF/COUGH/TALKBACK)
& 99-1191HEADPHONE
FADER PANEL
90-1875, 1.6" Mic Remote Panel Cable (for 99-1197 and 99-1198)
99-1197 or 99-1198
MIC CONTROL PANEL
RMXD ASSIGNABLE
LOGIC CONNECTOR
SIGNAL
PIN
Logic Ground
1
Off Tally
5
On Tally
11
+5 VDC Supply
7
Off Switch (-)
3
On Switch (-)
9
Cough Switch (-)
8
Talk to C/R (-)
2
Tally Common
6
+5 VDC supply
12
Enable Logic Inputs (+)
4
+5 VDC Supply
10
PIN
BLK
WHT
RED
GRN
BRN
BLU
ORG
YEL
SIGNAL
1
Logic GND
2
Off Tally
3
On Tally
4
Power Supply
5
Off Switch
6
On Switch
7
Cough Switch
8
Talkback Switch
PARTS LIST
Cable: Belden 9421 or equiv.
8-pin MOD IV Housing: 14-486 (Tyco-AMP 87631-4)
12-pin MOD IV housing: 14-490 (Tyco-AMP 87922-2)
MOD IV contacts: 15-938-1 (Tyco-AMP 102128-1)
6-4
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
VMCC, Sessions
and Macros
T
VMCC FILE MAINTENANCE
he VistaMax Control Center (VMCC) is
A
The VMCC application (icon:
) not only
simplifies device configuration, it also allows onethe software program station engineers use to cre-
stop file maintenance for every VistaMax community member—any console, cardframe or VistaMax
ate and maintain the configuration files needed
edge device.
After VMCC distributes the setup and config files
by all VistaMax community devices—including
to each community device, a PROVISIONED.HASH
file is written into the storage card folder. The next
RMXdigital consoles. Sessions and macros are
time Normal Download is selected to distribute
updated files,VMCC reads the hash file to identify
command files to route signals and to set up con-
which files match the newly provisioned files so
they are not re-downloaded and so only those files
soles for specific applications.
with changes are downloaded.
Chapter 4 covered console configuration, basic
If a hash file is not found (as in the first time
VMCC operations and standard commands for
VMCC downloads files), then VMCC will down-
session and macro files. This appendix presents
load all files, which is equivalent to selecting Force
addition details on using VMCC, session files and
Download. This always causes consoles and card-
macro files to set up and control signal routing in
frames to restart since the nqx.ini file is replaced.
the RMXdigital console. A VMCC errata section
COMMUNITY MONITOR (CM)
covers program use notes and applications.
The revision D release of the Harris # 99-5000
CM (tray icon:
) is not only a valuable tool
CD-ROM first introduced two major changes to
for setting up a VistaMax system, it’s also helpful
the VistaMax operating system. The first is that
for troubleshooting and analyzing a VistaMax sys-
all VistaMax devices (racks, BMXdigital consoles,
tem since it sees all VistaMax devices connected
RMXdigital consoles) can run using the same Vis-
to the network—even those with IP addresses fall-
taMax Server code. The second is that two Har-
ing outside the network’s assigned subnet.
ris-proprietary software programs:VistaMax Com-
IP addressing problems can occur if a new con-
munity Monitor (CM) and VistaMax Control Cen-
sole is added to a system that’s not using the de-
ter (VMCC) were used to create, maintain and
fault IP addressing scheme (as presented on page
properly distribute configuration files to all Vis-
4-10). A factory-fresh console has an IP address
taMax community devices. Previously, configura-
of 192.168.100.22 but, if the system is set for IP
tion files were created manually using a text-only
addresses using another subnet (say 137.237.
editor like Notepad and were distributed to all
207.xxx) then the new console will not be seen by
the community members by hand. Now, only ses-
the admin computer. Another way this might hap-
sion and macro files are edited using Notepad.
pen is if the IP address entered into VMCC had a
A-1
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
Appendix A VMCC
typo which was not caught and the file was dis-
VMCS_port entry line so it changes from this:
tributed to the console. When the Controller Card
VMCS_Port = 2002,U ;UDP protocol
restarts after file distribution, FTP Voyager would
to this:
no longer be able to see it, nor would any other
VMCS_Port = 2006,T ;TCP/IP protocol
community devices. But, since every community
device broadcasts its IP address using multicast
Community Monitor includes an application
messaging, CM will show it in its status window.
called Command Client which can be used to
To access such a “missing” device, change the
manual load a session or macro file or take up to
admin computer’s fixed IP address so it falls within
eight routes in one command line. The Command
the missing device’s subnet, as listed in the CM
Client is accessed from the Start menu (under Pro-
status display. Once that is done, use FTP Voy-
grams/Harris Corp/VistaMax on the admin com-
ager to view the device’s storage card and open
puter).
Select Options, then Setup to open up the setup
up the nqx.ini file so the IP address can be cor-
pane, as shown below:
rected in the file. Reset the admin computer back
to its previous fixed IP address (typically it is set
to 192.168.100.11).
Restart the device (reset the rack’s Controller
Card, the Session module on a BMXdigital console or the KSU on a RMXdigital console) so the
corrected IP address is used. If the problem was
caused by a typo, be sure to correct the IP address
Default Command Client Setup Windows
in VMCC and then redistribute the corrected files
to the device to update the hash table.
Enter the IP address of theVistaMax device you
want to communicate with (typically, this is the
VMCS (VistaMax Command Server)
Each VistaMax device can communicate with
main VistaMax or Envoy cardframe). The Group
external servers using either TCP/IP or UDP com-
Port entry should already be set to 2002 and UDP
mands. The communications format is set in the
selected, then click OK to close the pane.
If the VistaMax device is set to use TCP/IP pro-
nqx.ini file in the VMCS_Port definition entry
tocol (view the nqx.ini file if in doubt), then
line: VMCS_Port = 2002,U
This entry line is already in the template file
change the Group Port to 2006 and select TCP
that creates each nqx.ini file. It sets that device
instead of UDP, then click OK to close the setup
to respond to, and to send out, UDP commands.
pane.
When a device requires TCP/IP to be used in-
Click the Connect button in the Command Cli-
stead, then the nqx.ini file must be modified so
ent window (shown at the top of the next page) to
that TCP/IP commands are used.
initialize communications with the VistaMax de-
If only one device requires this setting (which is
vice. Once connected, the Connect button changes
much slower than communicating using UDP
to a Disconnect button, activating the lower half
commands), then instead of changing the template
of the window so a session or macro file name can
nqx.ini file, the nqx.ini file on the device can
be entered in the text box when the Session radio
be changed by editing the n q x . i n i file’s
button is selected. To enter a session or macro,
A-2
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
Appendix A VMCC
panel installed are still available, just like the four
phantom channels (channels 29-32) that are
present in each RMXdigital KSU.
When viewing the RMXd console cards in the
Explorer pane, each input card starts with the card
ID number assigned to that card. It is only on the
RMXd-28 that these numbers correspond to their
physical positions on the console. On the other
Command Client Window
frame sizes, card ID numbers will not necessarily
type the full name with suffix, then press Send to
correspond to their physical position in the frame.
load the session or macro.
Signal Naming Conventions
Click the Take radio button to route one or more
signals. To enter routes, each route is listed in this
RMXd consoles can show 10-character names
form: [source, destination]. Up to eight routes can
in their source name displays. The names shown
be entered. Each is separated by a comma:
are either the In Room Name or the Community
[161,241],[163,243],[165,245]
Name along with other identifiers.
Pressing Send then takes the routes, in order,
Which naming convention is used is assigned
on the VistaMax device. The entry example routes
by the Tier Naming Convention, which is set for
the first three mix-minus signals to the first three
each device in the community in the device edit
analog outputs on an RMXdigital console’s KSU
pane, just above the Source Include List.
card. If routes are made between two devices, then
Tier 1 naming is the default setting for con-
the signals must use the universal signal ID form
soles while Tier 2 is the default for cardframes
that includes the device numbers (e.g.,
(note: most users use Tier 2 for consoles and Tier
[D10.225,d3.129]).
1 on cardframes!). There are three Tier Naming
Conventions: 1, 2 and 3:
VMCC OPERATIONS ERRATA
The VMCC program first released with the 500-
TIER NAMING
CONVENTION
DISPLAYED SOURCE NAMES BY DEVICE:
LOCAL
GROUP
SYSTEM
TIER 1 (LOCAL)
MINIDISK1
MINIDISK1
MINIDISK1
series operating code is version 2.0, build 2092.
TIER 2 (GROUP) MINIDISK1
XYZ.MD1
XYZ.MD1
The following operational tips and function warn-
TIER 3 (SYSTEM) MINIDISK1
-PROD.MD1 XYZP.MD1
VMCC SETTINGS THAT GENERATED THE ABOVE NAMES:
In Room Name1 = MINIDISK1
Community Name1 = MD1
Call Sign2 = XYZ
Discipline Prefix2 = PROD
Name Radix3 = . (PERIOD)
Discipline Sort Character3 = - (DASH)
In Room Prefix3 = (BLANK)
ings apply to this build. Each build of the VMCC
software includes a ReleaseNotes.txt file in the
VMCC folder (C:\Program Files\Harris
Corp\VistaMax Control Center is the de-
1 - Entry set in the Signal Summary edit pane
2 - Entry set in the Device edit pane
3 - Entry set in the Community edit pane
fault path to the folder). The latest release build is
available for downloading from the Harris con-
Tier Naming Convention Summary
sole FTP site (see page 5-1 for access details).
In Tier 1 naming, the In Room Name is displayed for all community members. This means
RMXd Input Card Identification
Unlike BMXdigital consoles, RMXdigital inputs
the local, group and system publish files created
do not have an “uninstalled” option in VMCC. This
by VMCC for a device set to use Tier 1 are identi-
is because even channels without a Dual Fader
cal. This convention is most often used on Envoy
A-3
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
Appendix A VMCC
and VistaMax cardframes since these signals are
Call Sign groups then receive the System Publish
shared throughout the community. If the conven-
file, whose names consist of: the Call Sign, the first
tion is used on consoles, however, each common
character of the Discipline Prefix name and the
console signal name (PGM 1, PGM 2, and so on)
Community Name (e.g., XYZP.MD1).
must be given a unique name (PGM 1-AIR or
Setting RMXd Signal Include Lists
PROD-PGM 1, etc.) for each console so that the
signals can be properly selected. To get around
Which of the sources listed in the various pub-
having to uniquely name all of these common sig-
lish files are actually available to a particular con-
nals, Tier 2 naming is typically used on consoles.
sole is assigned in the main Source Include list in
On devices using Tier 1 Convention naming, the
the device editing pane. This sets which sources
Call Sign, Community Name, Discipline Prefix,
display on each channel strip and which sources
Discipline Sort Character and Name Radix are not
are available for the Real Air, Synthetic Air, Ex-
used so they can be left at their default settings.
ternal Cue and Talk to CR inputs. The meter and
On devices using Tier 2 Convention naming, the
monitor selectors have their own include lists.
Call Sign entry (up to four characters), Name Ra-
The routers.ini file’s [SrcInclude] listing is
dix character (one character) and Community
a sum of the sources in the main Source include
Name entries (up to four characters) are used to
list, the Meter include list and the two Monitor
create the signal names shown on the other de-
include lists. Thus a signal removed from the main
vices in the community.
include list—but which remains in the meter or
NOTE: When only Tier 1 and Tier 2 naming are
monitor include list, will still show up in the
used in a community, the Call Sign entry will typi-
routers.ini source list. Note, that if additional
cally be used to identify the console by room (e.g.,
signals are included on any edge devices hosted
Air, Prod, Img, News, etc.) rather than by the ac-
by the device, they are also summed into the
tual station Call Sign. In the examples on the pre-
routers.ini source include list.
vious page, this means the Group and System
The [DstInclude] list in routers.ini is equal
names for Tier 2 would display as PROD.MD1
to the Main Destination Include list entries plus
rather than XYZ.MD1 which better identifies the
any destinations assigned to edge devices hosted
signal as Minidisk player 1 in Production.
by that VistaMax device.
When multiple station groups are networked
RMXd Monitor/ Meter Key Definitions
in one VistaMax community, Tier 3 naming can
be used throughout the community to better dif-
The RMXd console editing pane allows the
ferentiate signal names between fellow group mem-
twenty-one source selection buttons for the Moni-
bers (those assigned the same Call Sign) and all of
tor, Meter and Studio 1 keys to be individually
the other devices in the community (those assigned
defined. Most keys have default sources assigned:
different Call Signs).
the top row of switches are assigned to the Real
In Tier 3 naming, the device publish file that
Air source (the button label is EXT), the next row
the fellow group members receive (those with the
is assigned to Send and the bottom four buttons
same Call Sign) is the Group Publish file. These
(PGM 1 thru PGM 4) are assigned to program
signal names consist of the Discipline Sort Char-
bus 1 thru 4. The TEL REC and TEL MON but-
acter, the Discipline Prefix and the Community
tons are not assigned by default since both of these
Name (e.g., -PROD.MD1). The devices in the other
signals are routed signals. To assign these signals
A-4
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
Appendix A VMCC
to the buttons, those two signals must first be
Talk to Studio 1 Co-Host, Talk to Studio 2, Talk
added to the various include lists. This is covered
to Studio 2 Host and Talk to Studio 2 Co-Host.
in the next section on Telco settings.
Setting a button to these logic command does not
cause problems, but they will not do anything on
Telc
oC
hannels
elco
Channels
an RMXdigital since it does not have any method
to use these specific logic commands.
A maximum of six channels can be defined as
RMXd Telco channels by setting the fader chan-
Duplic
ate C
ommunit
yN
ames
uplica
Communit
ommunity
Names
nels’ rotary switches to be a unique Telco number
(from 1 to 6).When an RMXd console is Inspected
VMCC allows multiple files to be saved with the
by VMCC, the fader channels defined as Telco chan-
same name since each one has a unique creation
nels are captured by the program. However, the
date. To avoid confusion, especially if there are
VMCC program does not assign nor use the Telco
multiple VMCC users, assign a unique name for
number, and hence will allow any fader channel
each new community after it’s first created.
to be manually set as a Telco channel. In no case,
Editing Card Complement on a Device
though, should more than six channels be designated as Telco channels in VMCC.
When editing the card complement on any de-
The third CR and Studio monitor selector but-
vice, you must wait for the processing to complete
ton (TEL MON) does not have a default assign-
or else program errors could be introduced. Pro-
ment in VMCC since the default source (Telco
cessing is complete once the community text
Monitor bus) must be routed. To assign this signal
blinks.
to the button, Telco Mon (signal 175) must be
Edge Device Parent Reassignment
added to the Monitor and Studio 1 Include lists.
The signal can then be set as the Switch 3 source
Each edge device has an assigned “parent” which
in the CR Monitor/Studio 1 Keys entry boxes.
is the community member with that edge device’s
The TEL REC signal (Telco Record, signal 173)
setup information in its edgedevice.ini file.
must also be included on the Meter Include List
If an existing edge device is assigned to a new
so it can be assigned to meter switch 3. It is rec-
parent in VMCC, the updated edgedevice.ini
ommended that the TEL REC signal also be in-
file will have to be provisioned and distributed to
cluded in the Monitor and Studio 1 Include lists
all of the affected consoles and cardframes to ef-
so that the board operator and talent can easily
fect the parent change on the edge device.
monitor the Telco record signals. The non-assigned
When there are dozens of edge devices in a com-
signals in the CR Monitor and Studio 1 include
munity, the affected edge device may not “hear”
lists are “dialed-up” by the operator using the two
the Initialize RCED command issued by VMCC
monitor source selectors.
after the new parent file is distributed. To ensure
the edge device is using the correct file, power cycle
Extr
a LLo
ogic Input S
elec
tions
tra
Selec
elections
that edge device to force it to retrieve its setup
information from its new parent.
VMCC has a list of logic commands that can be
assigned to remote mic control panel buttons. In-
Nesting E
dge D
evic
es
Edge
De
vices
cluded in this list are several signals that are only
available on the BMXdigital console. The signals
When Nest edge devices is checked under
that should not be selected on RMXdigital include:
Tools\Options\General tab, adding a new edge
A-5
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
Appendix A VMCC
device or changing the parent on an existing edge
If the two devices do not match exactly, VMCC
device does not automatically update the edge de-
only allows the inspected device to be added as a
vice location in the Explorer pane.
new community member.
Edge device positions get updated when: a new
The differences between the VMCC device and
device is added to the community; when the com-
the inspected device are listed in the Inspect win-
munity is reopened (File, Open Community); when
dow. Make note of the differences, click Cancel and
the Nest edge devices selection is cycled (To cycle
update the VMCC device accordingly.Then, inspect
the Nest selection, open the Options window,
the community again. Once the inspected device
uncheck Nest edge devices, then click OK to close
matches the VMCC device, VMCC will merge the
the options window. Reopen the Options window
inspected device attributes into the existing VMCC
and recheck Nest edge devices and click OK to
device.
close the options window.). The edge devices will
then properly nest under their parent.
Merge Devices List
If there is a changed device near the bottom of a
Inspection and Merge Devices Issues
long device list in the Merge Devices pane, there
Matching the Actual Community to an Existing
is no immediate indicator that decisions may be
VMCC-created Community
required. Always scroll down through the device
list looking for devices with changes.
Inspecting the actual devices, with the intent to
populate the null MAC addresses of a matching
VMCC-created community, brings up a Merge
Merge Devices with Multiple Changes
Devices pane after inspection has completed. This
If there are multiple devices with changes in the
pane shows a list of all devices which match in
Merge Devices pane, contiguous selections of
both IP address and physical card configuration
changed devices will display only the list of “Criti-
to those in the already existingVMCC-created com-
cal Issues” specific to the first changed device se-
munity.
lected. Selection of a device with no changes causes
There is no distinction in this pane between de-
the next changed device selected to display cor-
vices that match completely and devices that only
rectly.
need their MAC address populated in VMCC. Clicking Accept will populate the MAC addresses in
GENERAL SESSION/MACRO FILE INFO
those community members that matched. Even
The SBC uses a memory-resident database to
though it appears no action is required (the pane
maintain the file commands (the sections and their
shows that all the devices match), if Cancel is
entries) from the last session file loaded or macro
clicked, the MAC addresses are not filled in.
file taken on that console. To the SBC database,
handling a session or a macro file uses the same
procedure: clear the memory-resident database
Merging a “Real Device” with a VMCC-Entered Device
cleared to make room for the new file, then load
Inspecting a community, with the intent to merge
the files contents.
an inspected real facility device with a VMCC-entered device, only works if the inspected device
Since clearing the database doesn’t affect the
and the existing VMCC device match exactly in
control panel/hardware settings (the channels’
regards to framesize and the types of cards in-
source and button status is maintained by the
stalled and the card slot positions.
hardware fader modules), the operation of the conA-6
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
Appendix A VMCC
sole is not affected. However, all of the static sec-
uses a separate line within the section with a cor-
tions that were loaded when the previous session
responding Entry Value (there is a 1,000 charac-
or macro file was taken are erased, which includes
ter limit, which may be further limited by con-
the following session file sections: [Mapping],
straints imposed by a particular section); any text
[fader_start],[fix_fader],
proceeded by a semicolon (;) is a comment line
[fix_pan],[local_cough],
which can have up to 80 characters.
Config (.cfg) and setup (.ini) files are cre-
[Timer_Reset],[routercommand_1].
After the database is cleared, the new session or
ated and maintained through VMCC, so the fol-
macro file sections and entries are loaded into the
lowing information is most applicable to session
database and the commands are executed. For a
and macro files which are edited using Notepad.
macro file, the commands are simply run without
Here’s how a typical section and its entries ap-
regard to whether or not they match the console
pear in VistaMax files:
or cardframe hardware, the console config, etc. For
[Section Name]
;Section Comment Line
KeyValue=EntryValue ;Comment
session files, the [Mapping] section is used to
verify each command matches the console’s hardware configuration before the command is ex-
The [Section Name] defines what the sec-
ecuted to prevent incorrect routing, etc.
tion entry values set up. The name is specific and
Pressing the console’s Save Session button, or
must be entered using exact characters. Following
using the Save_Ses FTP literal command, causes
each [Section Name] heading is space avail-
the SBC to first take a “snapshot” of the current
able for one or more comment lines. Up to 32 com-
channel settings from the control panels/hardware,
ment lines can be added, as long as each com-
writing (or overwriting) those values (all of the
ment begins with a semicolon (;).
button sections and current routed sources for each
Each section can have up to 64 entry lines. Each
channel and the [Mapping] section data) into
entry line is composed of a Key Value followed by
the database. Thus, at the end of this process, but
= (equal sign) and an Entry Value. The Key Value
before the database is written to the new session
may be up to 32 characters in length. The
file, the database holds the current status of the
EntryValue may be up to 80 characters in length,
console’s buttons (bus, mode, PS, PF, Pan/Bal as-
plus each entry can be followed by an optional
signments, etc.) PLUS whatever previous static
comment—which can also be up to 80 characters
command sections were last loaded (e.g.,
in length (after a ;).
[fader_start],[local_cough],[fix_fader],
The format of the Entry Value is also Section
[Timer_Reset],[fix_pan],[routercommand_1],).
Name specific, and it may have multiple compo-
The new .ses file is then written.
nents, each separated by a comma.
When an Entry Value refers to a specific signal
Control File Formatting
in the VistaMax system it can be identified in three
VistaMax setup and configuration files are text-
ways: by its unique global number (e.g., 65697);
only files that share these common formatting
by its local number (e.g., 161), which is the same
rules: all command text is held within sections;
number on all devices of the same type; or, when
each section begins with a [Section Name]
the signal is referring to a signal on another de-
header can be up to 32 characters); each Key Value
vice, by using its universal number (e.g., d1.161),
A-7
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
Appendix A VMCC
which is the device number followed by a period
sole with Telco channels assigned. They must then
and the local signal number. Each of the example
be manually edited since RMXdigital has no con-
numbers reference the Mix-Minus 1 signal on the
trol surface buttons to set their conditions. These
console set as device 1.
set which Telco channels (labeled as Channel 81 -
The following command shows the use of local
86) feed the Telco record bus and/or the Telco
signal numbering:
monitor bus.
To have a Telco input feed the record or moni-
[RouterCommand_1]
take_1=161,241; MM-1 > KSU A1
take_2=163,243; MM-2 > KSU A2
tor bus when the session file is loaded, the Entry
Value is set for =1. In the following example, Telco
The following command shows the use of uni-
1 (e.g., Channel_81) is the only Telco that appears
versal signal numbering:
in the Telco Record output. Telco 2 (e.g., Chan-
[RouterCommand_1]
take_1=d1.161,d1.241; MM-1 > KSU A1
take_2=d1.163,d1.243; MM-2 > KSU A2
nel_82) is the only Telco going to the Telco monitor output.
[TelcoRecord]
Channel_81=1
Channel_82=0
Channel_83=0
Channel_84=0
Channel_85=0
Channel_86=0
The following command shows the use of global signal numbering:
[RouterCommand_1]
take_1=65697,65777; MM-1 > KSU A1
take_2=65699,65779; MM-2 > KSU A2
[TelcoMonitor]
Channel_81=0
Channel_82=1
Channel_83=0
Channel_84=0
Channel_85=0
Channel_86=0
There are three Excel spreadsheets included on
the 99-5000 CD-ROM that can be used to determine the local and global numbers for each signal
in any console or rack. The universal number is
simply the device indicator (d) and the device number (1 up to 63) followed by a period and the local
number, as shown in the above examples.
[chain]
There are also PDF files for each spreadsheet
This section can specify that one or multiple
that show the local and global numbers for device
other session or macro files be automatically
1 of each type of console and cardframe.
loaded, on any console or cardframe, when the
session is taken. It is most often used in macros,
Section Headings
but it can be used in sessions as well. The chain
command entry looks like this:
Most session file section headings define the
button states for the channel strip controls. Thus
[chain]
call_1=remote_1.mac,9
call_2=remote_2.mac
there are section headings for PGM 1, PGM 2,
Mode, Cue, etc. and under each heading is an en-
The first entry line loads a macro on a different
try for each channel strip in the console. These
types of headings were detailed in chapter 4.
device. In this case device 9, as defined by the ,9,
[Telco Record] and [Telco Monitor]
The second line loads a macro that’s on the same
has a remote_1.mac file in its sesfiles folder.
device (the remote_2.mac file is in the local
These two Telco section headings get automati-
sesfiles folder).
cally created when a session file is saved on a conA-8
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
Appendix A VMCC
The previous macro is selected on fader 12. If this
[RouterCommand_1]
Telco hybrid will also be available on fader 13,
This section can specify up to sixty-three routes
to be taken when the session or macro file is taken.
then this macro would be included on fader 13:
Typical usage was shown in the examples under
[RouterCommand_1]
take_1=337,153; Hybrid In > Fader 13
take_2=163,241; MM-2 > KSU Analog A
signal numbering on the previous page. Each
Take_x KeyValue, numbered sequentially starting from 1, defines one route. Each EntryValue
Macros can also perform complex audio and
then defines the source and the destination. In
logic switching functions. One typical use is to
take_1=161,241, signal 161 is the source and
switch the air chain between the main air studio
signal 241 is the destination.
and an emergency backup studio. In this example,
device 2 is the production room 1 console which
MACRO FILES
will be switched into the air chain, taking over
Macro files are text-only command files with a
from the main air studio. This macro switches the
.mac suffix. They are created using a text-only
PGM 1 feed from the product room to the air chain
editor like Notepad®. Macro files use the same
through the Sage Endec delay and a BTI switcher.
commands as session files, and are saved into the
The logic commands are used to switch “air con-
sesfiles folder on the SBC. They typically have only
trol indicators” in each studio and to switch con-
a few sections in them since a macro is created to
trol between a delay dump control panel in each
perform a specific task and so typically does not
room:
address console channel button settings.
[RouterCommand_1]
take_1=d2.225,135; P1 PGM1 to Delay
take_2=135,71; Delay to Sage
take_3=71,81; Sage to BTI ana switch
take_4=71,137; Sage to BTI dig switch
The most common macro application is to performing return routing for two-way devices, like
ISDNs and Telco hybrids. These devices require a
mix-minus signal—which is specific to which fader
[port_event_card_4]
port_event_30=1; Momentary Closure
the two-way device appears on, to be routed from
the appropriate mix-minus bus to the two-way de-
[port_config_card_4]
port_config_15=2; P1 on-air latch
port_config_16=0; P2 unlatched on-air
port_config_17=0; Air delay panel off
port_config_18=2; P1 1 delay panel ON
port_config_19=0; P2 delay panel off
port_config_21=0; Air in delay off
port_config_22=2; P1 in delay ON
port_config_23=0; P2 in delay off
vice. To do this, multiple macro files are created to
control the two-way routing. These macros are
what the operators actually select on the Telco
channels in the console. One macro is created for
each two-way device and for each fader channel
that device is available on.
Each of these types of macros has two routes:
Macros are loaded by: an operator using a fader
one routes that Telco device to the fader; the sec-
source selector that has macros included in its sig-
ond routes the mix-minus for that fader channel
nal list; through a chain command in a session or
to the Telco device. Here’s a couple examples where
other macro file: UDP commands from a digital
the Telco hybrid connects to the KSU A Analog
playback system networked with the VistaMax
input (from network signal) and the A Analog out-
system; using a manual file load FTP command;
put (send to network signal).
using Task Scheduler to load macros by date/time.
Macro files are stored in the SesFiles folder along
[RouterCommand_1]
take_1=337,151; Hybrid In > Fader 12
take_2=161,241; MM-1 > KSU Analog A
with session files, however, since they do not have
A-9
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
Appendix A VMCC
Filename is the macro’s file name minus the
a .ses suffix, they do not show up in the Session
selector. If a board operator needs to load a macro,
.mac file extension.
under 500-series code, the macro can be included
,d is an optional entry to specify a device num-
as a “source” when using VMCC to set up the con-
ber. The device number identifies which device has
sole, and are then selected on a fader channel just
the macro file. The macro runs on that device. No
like signals. When the operator presses Take on
entry says the macro is on the local device.
Alternately, in 500-series code, macros can be
the fader channel the macro is taken.
In 400-series code, macros must be exclusively
added to the included signals list in the routers.ini
assigned on a fader channel—no audio signals
file by entering the macro file names into VMCC
could be displayed along with the macros. This
at the device level:
limitation is removed in the 500-series operating
system code, which allows intermixed signals and
macros on any fader channel or edge device.
Here is how a standard router definition
([Router_4]) and one set exclusively for loading
Adding Macro File Names into VMCC is Done
at the Device Level in 500-Series Code
macros ([Router_5]) appear in the session file:
[Router_4]
include_1=257-287,321-335
Take=259
[Router_5]
macro_1=dallas
macro_2=chicago
macro_3=tucson
macro_4=bayonne,6
Macro Files are Also Included at the Device Level
Once the macro files are included at the device
Router 4 is a typical router section with a chan-
level, the routers.ini and the various publish files
nel-specific include list (to limit the sources dis-
are updated by distributing new files to the sys-
played) with a take command to route a signal to
tem devices. Macros are then handled as if they
the fader channel when the session file is taken.
are signals with a special prefix (M1, M2, M3, and
Router 5 is set to display only four macros in
so on). The macro numbers to macro files are iden-
its source list using the 400-series code format,
tified at the top of the local_publish.cfg file:
which can also be used in 500-series code. Macros 1, 2 and 3 are on the local device. Macro 4
;macros
mac=1,remote
mac=2,telco_norm
mac=3,request
(bayonne) is loaded on device 6. Here is the session file command syntax for assigning macros to
a router channel:
[Router_x]
Macro_n=Filename,d
Here is a typical 500-series channel-specific include list with both signals and macros in the list.
x is the channel ID of the router channel.
In the example, the three macros shown in the
n sequentially numbers the macro entries, start-
publish file example are included:
ing from 1. Up to 63 macros could be assigned to
any one router channel.
Include_1_1=D23.65-135,M1-3
A-10
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
Appendix A VMCC
them—including the phantom channels, from a
When the operator dials through the available
sources, the macro names (remote, telco_norm,
session or macro file. To use these phantom buses,
request) appear in the list alphanumerically
edit the session file by changing the channel entry
along with the other signal sources included.
under the appropriate phantom bus header from
the default setting of C h a n n e l _ x x = 0 to
Fader Channel Macro Usage
Channel_xx=1. This setting assigns the channel
When taking macros, the same rules apply as
to that bus. These bus signals are included in the
for signals: if the channel is Off, taking a macro
standard source signal list in VMCC. Here are the
causes it to execute immediately. While the chan-
phantom bus headers—which are always included
nel is On, taking any macro—local or remote, will
in each session file, and what each controls:
show brackets around the name because the macro
• [Solo] Assigns the channel to the solo
bus (since the signal is taken post switch
is pending. It is then executed as soon as the channel is turned Off.
and post fader, this command is not very
useful on phantom channels).
• [Send_2] Assigns the channel to the Send
Macros listed on a fader channel using the 400series format causes the console automation to
check the local sesfiles folder to verify that the
2 bus.
macro file is actually present. If the macro file is
• [Utl_1, Utl_2, Utl_3, Utl_4]
Assigns the channel to one or more Utility
not found, the name is surrounded by arrows:
> Macro name <
when dialed up on a
buses.
fader channel. If this macro is subsequently taken,
• [Send_2_PF, Utl_1_PF, Utl_2_PF,
Utl_3_PF, Utl_4_PF] Sets the channel to feed a bus pre-fader. This setting does
nothing if the channel is not assigned to
the name is surrounded by square brackets,
[ Macro name ] to indicate the macro is
pending since it was not found.
the same bus.
Note that this function only checks the local
• [Send_1_PS, Utl_1_PS, Utl_2_PS,
Utl_3_PS, Utl_4_PS] Sets the channel to feed a bus pre-switch. This setting
does nothing if the channel is not assigned
device. When macro files from other devices are
listed it is assumed they execute as requested since
there is no indication the macro file did not load
as requested.
to the same bus.
PHANTOM CHANNELS & BUSES
To use the phantom buses, they must be routed
Each RMXdigital includes four “phantom chan-
to a VistaMax destination. For example, if the Util-
nels”—special-purpose input channels within the
ity 1 bus is being used, it can be routed to the
KSU DSP, that can be used just like any other
KSU digital output D by adding this route entry:
input channel, albeit without any physical controls. Any input slot covered by a blank panel (e.g.,
[RouterCommand_1]
take_1=229,255;UTL 1 > KSU digital D
no Dual Fader panel is installed in that slot) means
there are two more phantom channels available
If the Pre-Fader and/or Pre-Switch entries are
for each blank panel in the console.
Each RMXdigital also includes several “phan-
set to =1, then that channel’s signal is immedi-
tom buses” that can have any channel assigned to
ately applied, at unity gain, to the bus when the
A-11
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
Appendix A VMCC
session file is taken. If the signal level must be set
could affect on-air audio if used improperly and
to a level other than unity gain, then do not use
thus should only be used in a special session file.
pre-fader, but instead enter a fader level setting
To avoid this situation, when using phantom
for the channel by adding a [fix_fader] sec-
channels it is best to assign them to a send or util-
tion to the session file.
ity bus where the pre-switch setting can be set true
(e.g. [Send_1_PS] or [Utl_1_PS] set to =1).
A Fix Fader entry of Channel_xx=B5 is the
same as setting the fader to nominal (-12) or as-
External Cue and External Talk to C/R
signing the channel under the pre-fader header.
Hex numbers from 00 (fader off) to FF (fader max)
The last two KSU phantom channels, Phantom
are valid. A PDF file (fix_fader_entry_table.pdf)
3 (destination 221) and Phantom 4 (destination
is included on the 99-5000 CD-ROM that lists the
signal 223) are typically used as the destinations
hex value versus fader position and channel gain.
for the External Talk to C/R and the External Cue
signals. If these two signals are used with the phan-
Phantom Channels and Pending Mode
tom channels, then the source inputs are defined
in VMCC (console edit pane). No other routing or
When a phantom channel must be assigned to
assignments are required.
a Program bus, since there is no pre-switch setting on these buses, the session section [On] must
be used to specifically turn the phantom channel
To activate the External Talk to C/R signal, pull
on (Channel_xx=1) or off (Channel_xx=0). If
pin 11 on the Cue/Talk/Ext connector low (with
this entry is not included in every session file, then
pin 10 on the connector jumpered to +VDC). The
the phantom channel could be put into pending
External Talk input is routed to the Control Room
mode, just like any other channel that is On when
talk destinations (Talk to CR output, Cue speaker
a session file is taken—the “On button” winks and
and Operator headphones are the three possible
the new session information is not loaded into that
destinations) while the pin is held low.
channel until it is turned off. But, since phantom
To activate the External Cue signal, pull pin 12
channels do not have physical buttons, there is no
on the Cue/Talk/Ext connector low (with pin 10
way to identify when a phantom channel is stuck
on the connector jumpered to +VDC). The Exter-
in Pending Mode other than the signal remains
nal Cue input is routed to the Cue speaker (and
fed to that PGM bus.
the Cue output) and to the auxiliary meter, which
If a phantom channel does get into pending
displays the Cue level. Note that Cue is muted when
mode, the only way to turn it off (short of power
a C/R mic channel is On. Cue will also feed the
cycling the console!) is to run a session file that
operator headphones if the AutoCue button is lit.
has this section:
[force_off]
channel_13=1
channel_14=0
channel_15=0
channel_16=0
which forces the first phantom channel off to remove it from a pending state. Needless to say, this
A-12
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
Appendix A VMCC
500-SERIES CODE FEATURES
right arrow) so the names appear in the Call Group
Members list at the right side.
The 500-series code has added several new features, including the ability to include macro names
Once the call groups are formed, they are added
with signal sources names on both edge devices
to the include list for the intercom parent device:
and fader channel source selectors, as previously
outlined.
Intercom Call Groups
Another major new feature in 500-series code
Including Call Groups at the device level
is Intercom call groups. This feature allows multiple intercom stations to be called using a single
The Call Groups are then available to be as-
hot key. As in 400-series code, you can press mul-
signed to hot keys on each intercom panel:
tiple hot keys to call multiple stations, but each
hot key had previously only been assignable to
one intercom panel. Now, with 500-series code,
one hot key can be assigned to a call group, which
means that multiple intercom stations can be
paged or called simultaneously through using
VMCC.
Including Call Groups at the Intercom level,
and Assigning a Call Groups to a Hot Key
Creating Intercom call groups is done at the top
level of the VistaMax or Envoy cardframe that
holds the Hub with Intercom card:
Automatic Reverse Logic Routing
This feature is used to command an automatic
logic return route from a fader to the peripheral
device when the peripheral is routed to a fader.
Reverse routing is assigned to each peripheral
Creating a Call Group is Done at theDevice Level
device after the output logic bindings are set. Right
Click Create New Call Group... to open up a dia-
clicking in the Logic Bindings pane pops up the
log box to enter a group name of up to ten charac-
Add Return Route selection box. Select Add Re-
ters, then click Add. The new group name then
turn Route. Now, when that peripheral is selected
appears in the Groups column so intercom panels
on a fader channel, the fader channel logic com-
can be added to create the group. Highlight the
mands are automatically routed back to the
names of the intercom panels to include in the
peripheral’s logic output—no matter which device
highlighted call group, then click the >> (double
has that logic connection.
Assigning Members to a Call Group is
also Done at the Device Level
Adding Automatic Logic Return Routing
A-13
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
Appendix A VMCC
in the past since macro files do not have to cre-
In 400-series code, return logic routes were
ated to handle the return logic routing.
manually created by using a macro file to route
the signal with logic to a channel and to then route
There are still some signals where using return
the logic from the fader channel back to the pe-
logic routing may not be desirable. That’s because
ripheral device.
automatic return logic routing is made each time
This could be problematic if the console was
that signal is routed to a fader. Thus, someone on
dayparted and one daypart had a CD player on
another console might dial up that source and steal
fader 15 while other dayparts had an Instant Re-
logic control away, removing control from the origi-
play and a VoxPro routed to the same fader. The
nal fader. If this occurs, simply retake the signal
problem was that the return logic route would not
to move return logic control back to the previous
be affected when the source routed to the fader
channel.
channel was changed. Thus even though the CD
Because of this, there may be some signals (like
player was routed to the channel, the return logic
digital playback channels that are dedicated to one
would remain tied to the previous peripheral. This
room) that should not have the reverse logic rout-
same problem would occur when multiple logic
ing feature selected to ensure that the logic can-
controlled devices are selected on a single fader
not be accidentally routed from another fader
channel.
channel.
To solve this issue, macros, instead of source
signals, are selected by the operator. Each macro
routes the desired signal to the fader, releases the
logic route going to the other devices with logic
available to that fader, and routes the logic to the
selected peripheral. Here’s a typical macro for routing return logic, required for 400-series code:
[RouterCommand_1]
Take_1=277,157 ;CD 2 to fader 15
Take_2=157,277 ;return logic to CD 2
Take_3=-1,339 ;cancel logic-VoxPro
Take_4=-1,343 ;cancel logic-InstRply
This macro routes CD 2 to fader 15 and routes
the channel 15 logic to the CD player, while also
routing silence (the -1 source) to the VoxPro and
Instant Relay to ensure the channel 15 logic no
longer controls those devices. Similar macros
would be created for the VoxPro and Instant Replay to remove the logic from the other devices.
When 500-series code is sued, this same process can be used, but in most cases it is far simpler to assign return routing on most signals since
the net result is that signal source selection with
logic control is much easier than it ever has been
A-14
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T
Revision C • 10/07
I
O
N
I
Index
Index
Page numbers listed as chapter-page.
A
C
Accessories
Accessory Panels .................................. 6-1
Cabinet Plates ...................................... 6-1
Divider Kits ......................................... 6-3
Furniture and Cabinetry ....................... 6-1
Headphone Distribution Amp .............. 6-3
Host Turret .......................................... 6-3
Mic Remote Control Panels .................. 6-2
Studio Selector & Fader Panels ............. 6-2
AES/EBU Connections ............................ 2-12
AMP MOD IV Connectors
Contact Insertion & Removal .............. 2-11
Crimp Tool Crimping .......................... 2-11
Housings, Audio ................................. 2-12
Housings, Logic ................................ 2-15
Assignable Logic
Logic I/O & Peripherals ..................... 2-17
Overview ............................................ 2-17
Signal Definitions ............................... 2-23
Audio
Analog Connections ............................ 2-12
Digital Connections ............................ 2-12
RMXdigital Sample Rate .................... 2-13
S/PDIF Connections ........................... 2-13
Unbalanced Connections .................... 2-13
Auxiliary Meter
Controls, Quick Guide ......................... 3-5
DIP Switch Settings ............................ 2-6
Location .............................................. 2-4
Cabinet Cutout ............................................ 2-1
Cabinet Plates ............................................. 6-1
Cabling and Wiring .................................. 2-10
Audio Connections ............................. 2-12
Connector Access ................................ 2-10
Crimp Tool Operation ......................... 2-11
Logic Connectors ................................ 2-14
Required Cables and Wire .................. 2-10
Unbalanced Connections .................... 2-13
Wire Preparation ............................... 2-10
Channel Configuration ................................ 2-3
Channel ID Numbers ............................... 4-20
Clock
DIP Switch settings .............................. 2-6
On Console Display .............................. 3-8
Setting the Time ................................... 2-5
Troubleshooting ................................... 5-6
Community Monitor .................................... 4-5
Complex Logic Connection Example ........ 2-29
Component Descriptions ............................ 1-3
Connection Examples
Basic Logic Example .......................... 2-28
Complex Logic Example .................... 2-29
Mic Remote Control Example ............. 2-27
Connections
Audio ................................................. 2-14
Logic .................................................. 2-14
Quick Guide list ................................. 2-16
Unbalanced ........................................ 2-13
Connector Access ...................................... 2-10
Console Display
Connections ........................................ 2-19
Installation ........................................... 2-4
Operation Quick Guide ........................ 3-8
Overview .............................................. 1-5
Service ................................................ 5-6
Setting DIP switches ............................ 2-6
B
Backup Batteries
Installing .............................................. 2-9
Servicing .............................................. 5-7
Bargraph Meters
Description ........................................... 3-8
DIP Switch Settings ............................. 2-7
Troubleshooting .................................. 5-6
Basic Peripheral Device Logic Example ... 2-28
INDEX-1
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T I O N
Revision C • 10/07
Index
Page numbers listed as chapter-page.
C (CONT.)
F
Console
Connections ........................................ 2-20
Initial Configuration Procedure ........... 4-7
Installation .......................................... 2-2
Operation Overview ............................. 3-1
Source Signal Setup .............................. 4-1
Control Panel Removal & Servicing ............ 5-3
Control Room (section, Monitor Control panel)
Operation Quick Guide ....................... 3-6
Overview ............................................. 1-4
Control Room Logic I/O
Overview ............................................ 2-16
Signal Definitions ............................... 2-22
Crimp Tool Operation ............................... 2-11
Cue/Talk/External Logic I/O
Overview ............................................ 2-17
Signal Definitions ............................... 2-24
Facet Connections ..................................... 2-21
Fader Panels ............................................... 6-2
Fader Servicing ........................................... 5-5
File Structure, RMXd ................................. 4-1
Forty-Eight (48)-Volt Supply ...................... 5-7
Frame Component Information ................... 5-8
Frame Configuration ................................... 2-2
Furniture and Cabinetry ............................. 6-1
FTP Site Information ................................. 5-1
FTP Voyager Program ................................ 4-6
G
General Information ................................... 1-1
Global Signal ID Number ......................... 4-20
Grounding and Shielding ........................... 2-8
Guest Panels (Mic Remote Panels) ............. 6-2
H
D
Harris Contact Information ........................ 5-1
Hazard Label Identification ........................... v
Headphone Distribution Amp .................... 6-3
Host Turret Panel ....................................... 6-3
Declaration of Conformity ............................. iv
Denon CD Player Connection Example ..... 2-28
Device Publish File (Dx_publish.cfg) .......... 4-5
Digital Sample Rate .................................. 2-13
Dimensions
Console Display .................................... 1-7
Furniture Cutout .................................. 2-1
Mainframe ............................................ 1-7
Power Supply ....................................... 1-7
Divider Kit ................................................. 6-3
DSP Card
Overview .............................................. 1-5
I
init.mac File ............................................... 4-2
Settings ............................................. 4-20
init.mac Sections ............................... 4-25
Inputs
KSU Card .......................................... 2-21
8-Input Expansion Card .................... 2-25
Installation ................................................. 2-1
Installation Kit Parts .................................. 5-2
Installing Backup Batteries ........................ 2-9
inventory.txt File ........................................ 4-3
IP Addressing, Suggested ......................... 4-10
E
Edgedevice.ini File ..................................... 4-4
Eight (8)-Input Expansion Card
Overview .............................................. 1-5
Quick Guide ....................................... 2-23
ENCO DADPro Connection Example ........ 2-27
ESE
Cable Connection .................................. 6-3
Master Clock ....................................... 2-5
Event Timer
DIP switch Settings .............................. 2-6
On Console Display .............................. 3-8
Troubleshooting ................................... 5-6
Ethernet Connection ................................. 2-21
K
KSU Card
Overview ............................................. 1-5
Quick Guide ...................................... 2-21
Connections ....................................... 2-21
L
local_publish.cfg File .................................. 4-4
Logic
Assignable Logic ................................ 2-17
Block Diagrams .................................. 2-15
INDEX-2
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T I O N
Revision C • 10/07
Index
Page numbers listed as chapter-page.
L (CONT.)
P
Logic (continued)
Cable, Mic Remote Panel ...................... 6-4
Connectors ........................................ 2-14
Control Room Logic ........................... 2-16
Cue/Talk/External Logic .................... 2-17
Interface ............................................ 2-16
Microphone Logic .............................. 2-17
Studio Logic ....................................... 2-16
Parts
Ordering .............................................. 5-1
Part Lists ............................................ 5-2
Peripheral Devices
Basic Peripheral Example ................. 2-28
Complex Peripheral Example ............ 2-29
Peripherals & Assignable Logic ......... 2-18
Power Supply
Connecting .......................................... 2-8
Connector Pinouts ............................... 5-7
Dimensions ......................................... 1-7
Grounding Notes ................................. 2-8
Overview .............................................. 1-5
Service ................................................. 5-7
Product Overview ....................................... 1-1
Provisioned.hash File ................................. 4-2
M
Mainframe
Configuration ...................................... 2-2
Connector Access ............................... 2-10
Console Display Connection ............... 2-19
Frame Dimensions ............................... 1-7
Furniture Cutout ................................. 2-1
Overview ............................................. 1-1
Main Component Descriptions ................... 1-3
Main Meter
DIP Switch Settings ............................ 2-6
Location .............................................. 2-4
Manual Revisions .......................................... vi
Meters (see Bargraph Meters)
Microphone Info
Microphone Logic ............................. 2-17
Mic Connections ................................ 2-18
Q
Quick Guides
Frame & Console ............................... 2-20
KSU Card .......................................... 2-21
8-Input Expansion Card .................... 2-25
Mic Remote Logic ............................. 2-27
Basic Peripheral Logic ...................... 2-28
Complex Peripheral Logic ................. 2-29
Universal Dual Fader Panel ................. 3-2
Monitor Control Panel ......................... 3-4
Console Display ................................... 3-8
Mic Remote Control Example ............ 2-27
Mic Remote Control Panels ................. 6-2
Mic Remote Panel wiring .................... 6-4
Mic Logic thru VistaMax ................... 2-18
Monitor Control panel
Operation Quick Guide ....................... 3-4
Overview ............................................. 1-4
Motherboard Info ..................................... 5-10
R
release.txt File ............................................ 4-2
Repair Service ............................................ 5-1
RMXdigital Applications ............................ 3-9
RMXdigital Server
Configuration ...................................... 4-5
Configuration Notes & Tips ............... 4-10
File Structure ...................................... 4-1
Recovering Server Settings ................ 4-27
Server Files, Overview .......................... 4-2
TFTP Server ..................................... 4-27
routers.ini File ............................................ 4-3
Rotary Switches, Setting ............................. 2-3
N
nqx.ini File ................................................. 4-5
nqx.ini Settings ........................................ 4-10
O
Operation ................................................... 3-1
Outputs, Audio & Logic
KSU Card .......................................... 2-21
8-Input Expansion Card .................... 2-25
INDEX-3
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T I O N
Revision C • 10/07
Index
Page numbers listed as chapter-page.
S
S (CONT.)
Safety Instructions ......................................... v
Sample Rate ............................................. 2-13
Server (see RMXdigital Server)
serverid.txt File .......................................... 4-3
Service ....................................................... 5-1
Servicing
Backup Batteries ................................. 5-7
Clock ................................................... 5-6
Control Panels ..................................... 5-5
Event Timer ........................................ 5-6
Faders ................................................. 5-5
Meters ................................................. 5-6
Power Supply ...................................... 5-7
SesFiles Folder ........................................... 4-2
Session Files ............................................. 4-17
Channel Button Settings .................... 4-21
Channel Lockout Section ................... 4-22
Channel ID Numbers ......................... 4-20
Downloading Sessions ........................ 4-18
Editing Sessions ................................. 4-17
Global Signal ID Numbers ................ 4-20
Include Lists ..................................... 4-24
Information Section ............................ 4-21
init.mac File Sections ......................... 4-25
Making a Template Session ................. 4-17
Mapping Section ................................ 4-23
Overview ............................................. 1-2
Recalling and Loading Sessions .......... 4-17
Renaming Sessions ............................ 4-19
Router Assignment Sections .............. 4-23
Saving Session Files ........................... 4-17
Template Files ................................... 4-17
Uploading Sessions ............................ 4-19
Using Session Files ............................ 4-17
Session (section, Monitor Control panel)
Operation Quick Guide ....................... 3-5
Overview ............................................. 1-4
Setting the Clock ........................................ 2-5
Software Updates ..................................... 4-27
S/PDIF Signals ........................................ 2-13
Specifications ............................................. 1-6
Studio (section, Monitor Control panel)
Operation Quick Guide ....................... 3-7
Overview ............................................. 1-4
Studio Control Turret ................................. 6-2
Studio Logic I/O
Overview ........................................... 2-16
Signal Definitions .............................. 2-22
Studio Monitor Selector panel .................... 6-2
Studio Host Turret ..................................... 6-3
SysFiles Folder ........................................... 4-3
T
TFTP Server ............................................ 4-27
Technical Ground ....................................... 2-7
Telco Channels
Foldback Mix .................................... 3-10
Record Output .................................. 3-11
Setting Telco ID number ...................... 2-3
Telco/Codec Operation ...................... 3-10
Template Session ...................................... 4-17
Test Interface ........................................... 2-21
Timer (See Event Timer)
Tool Kit ....................................................... 5-2
3CDaemon Program ................................... 4-6
U
Unbalanced Connections ........................... 2-13
Universal Dual Fader Panel
Operation Quick Guide ........................ 3-2
Overview .............................................. 1-3
Updating Software .................................... 4-27
V
VistaMax Connection Quick Guide ........... 2-26
VistaMax Integration .................................. 3-9
VistaMax Control Center (VMCC)
File Maintenance ................................ A-2
General Program Info .......................... 1-2
Using the Program .............................. 4-5
Graphical User Interface ...................... 4-7
Operations Errata ............................... A-3
W
Warning Label Identification .......................... v
Warranty ..................................................... 1-8
Wiring and Cabling
Crimp Tool Operation ........................ 2-11
Required Cables and Wire ................. 2-10
Wire Preparation .............................. 2-10
INDEX-4
H A R R I S
C O R P O R A T I O N
Revision C • 10/07
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement